JP6887231B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

As a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which music can be selected according to the movement of the player, and the selected music can be output in different modes depending on whether the selected music is in an advantageous state or a non-advantageous state.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-233406

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 lacks a directing effect when selecting a musical piece.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the effect of producing a musical piece.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by displaying fluctuations.
The timer effect is executed by the period display means (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, effect display device 909 of FIG. 55, second area 9092, S90802 of FIG. 53) for displaying the period display (timer display in the second area 9092 of FIG. 55). Processing, etc.) and
A predetermined effect executing means (effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (super reach effect, etc.) when the period display becomes a predetermined mode (when the timer display becomes 0 seconds in the second area 9092 of FIG. 55, etc.). Microcomputer 90100, processing to execute super reach effect with S90802 in FIG. 53, etc.)
In the display area of the period display (second display area 92 of FIG. 55), a specific display means (for effect control) capable of displaying a specific display (specific display such as “?” Shown in FIG. 59 ) different from the period display. A process of executing a specific display on the effect display device 909 of FIG. 55 and S90802 of FIG. 53, such as a microcomputer 90100).
A music playing means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes step S634 in FIG. 17) capable of playing music in a specific period (for example, a period in a jackpot gaming state), and
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player,
Regarding the effect related to the game, it is possible to adjust the effect based on the operation of the operation means by the player (for example, volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, mode switching, etc.).
The music to be played in the specific period can be selected from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 18C).
At the time of selecting a musical piece, the musical piece reproducing means reproduces a specific part which is a part of the selected musical piece and is different from the beginning of the musical piece (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 17). Such),
At the time of the effect adjustment, it is possible to display a status display regarding the adjustment status (for example, volume adjustment status, brightness adjustment status, mode switching status, etc.).
First state (for example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a gaming state other than during super reach production, or a state in which an error is not displayed due to a customer waiting state, etc., and in a slot machine, a gaming state other than continuous production, or a customer. In a state such as a waiting state in which an error is not displayed, the status display is visually displayed regardless of the presence or absence of an operation for adjusting the effect (for example, processing execution such as step S162 by the effect control CPU 120). The volume adjustment status is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the above),
A second state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine during a super reach effect) that executes a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect on a pachinko gaming machine, a continuous effect on a slot machine, etc.) in a state different from the first state. , In a slot machine, in a gaming state during continuous production, etc.), if there is no operation for adjusting the effect, the status display is made difficult to see or invisible (for example, processing execution such as step S614 by the effect control CPU 120). The volume adjustment status is not displayed on the image display device 5 according to the above), and when the operation for the effect adjustment is performed, the status display is visibly displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied.
When the operation for adjusting the effect is performed in the first state, the display of the status display is continued even if the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The period display is
Depending on the execution contents of executable special effect before the period display is displayed, different ratio of the period appears after the special effect is performed,
In the case uncontrolled advantageously state and when it is controlled to an advantageous state, different proportions of or determining in any of the plurality of execution timing the period display,
In the case uncontrolled and advantageous condition when controlled to an advantageous state, Ri Do different percentage of either determining in any of the periods display of the display mode of the plurality of display modes,
The specific display is an expectation suggestion display (display of "No way? (Low expectation)", "Intense heat (high expectation)", etc. in FIG. 59) that suggests the expectation controlled to the advantageous state. , Including reach suggestion display (display of "battle (battle reach suggestion)" shown in FIG. 59, etc.) that suggests which type is executed among a plurality of types of reach effects that can be executed in the variable display. ,
The expectation suggestion display is a first expectation suggestion display suggesting that the expectation is the first expectation, and a second suggestion that the expectation is a second expectation higher than the first expectation. Including expectation suggestion display
According to such a configuration including the reach effect and the notification effect notifying that the predetermined effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the effect at the time of selecting a musical piece can be improved, and the effect can be improved. It is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the request of the player while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
At the time of music selection, the image corresponding to the music to be played in the specific period and the image corresponding to the music in the display means (for example, the display area VA1 shown in FIG. 19B) for displaying the image corresponding to the specific portion. An image display device 5 or the like for displaying the above is provided.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when the music is selected.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
A storage means for storing one musical piece as voice data divided into a plurality of parts including specific part data indicating the sound of the specific part (for example, as shown in FIG. 19A, a plurality of voices including rust data). Equipped with a ROM 121 that stores data, etc.)
At the time of selecting the music, the music reproduction means reproduces the specific part of one music based on the specific part data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 17), and the music reproduction means. In a specific period, the voice data divided into the plurality of pieces may be connected to reproduce one musical piece (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S634 in FIG. 17).
According to such a configuration, the burden on the data capacity can be reduced.

( 4 ) In any of the game machines (1) to ( 3) above,
Notification effect execution means for executing notification effect (for example, prize ball number notification effect, acquired number number notification effect, cumulative prize ball number notification effect, cumulative acquired number number notification effect, probability change confirmation notification effect, consecutive chan number notification, big hit song name notification , Right-handed notification, error notification, production control CPU 120 that executes jackpot promotion effect, etc.)
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means is a first notification effect that notifies the magnitude of the value acquired in the specific period (for example, the number of prize balls that notify the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during a big hit). (Notification effect, etc.) and a second notification effect that notifies the magnitude of the value acquired in the special period (for example, a prize ball number notification effect that notifies the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during a big hit during consecutive chans, etc.) ) And is feasible,
The first notification effect and the second notification effect have different priorities (for example, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in the process of step S397 in the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 31). The cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed, etc.).
According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means (A1) to (A9). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a period display such as a timer display is performed as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-61767, and when the period display becomes a predetermined mode (0 seconds), a predetermined mode is displayed. A gaming machine that performs production is known. However, in such a gaming machine, the production was not considered at all with respect to the process before the period display was executed, and it was not interesting. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game in the process before executing the period display.

(A1) In order to achieve the above objectives, the gaming machine according to another aspect is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can display fluctuations and control it to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
The timer effect is executed by the period display means (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, effect display device 909 of FIG. 55, second area 9092, S90802 of FIG. 53) for displaying the period display (timer display in the second area 9092 of FIG. 55). Processing, etc.) and
A predetermined effect executing means (effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (super reach effect, etc.) when the period display becomes a predetermined mode (when the timer display becomes 0 seconds in the second area 9092 of FIG. 55, etc.). Microcomputer 90100, processing to execute super reach effect with S90802 in FIG. 53, etc.)
In the display area of the period display (second display area 92 of FIG. 55), a specific display means (for effect control) capable of displaying a specific display other than the period display (specific display such as “?” Shown in FIG. 59). A microcomputer 90100 or the like, an effect display device 909 of FIG. 55, and a process of executing a specific display in S90802 of FIG. 53) are provided.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether the period display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the period display.

(A2) The gaming machine of the above (A1).
As a display pattern in the display area, a period display pattern (FIG. 59) for displaying the period display after executing a specific effect (such as an effect of rotating display information in the second area 9092 as shown in FIG. 55 (e)). A timer display pattern that displays a timer effect suggestion such as the "READY GO" display shown in (1) and a specific display pattern that displays the specific display after executing the specific effect (shown in FIG. 59). It may be provided with a display pattern of a specific display for displaying a specific display such as a “?” Display).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether the period display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the period display.

(A3) The gaming machine of the above (A2).
The period display pattern and the specific display pattern can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variation display (as shown in FIG. 57, the second region effect is executed at a plurality of timings such as at the start of the variation or before the start of the reach. (Possible, etc.), and the degree of expectation that the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on the execution timing (as shown in FIG. 57, the selection ratio of the execution timing of the second region effect differs between the time of loss and the time of big hit, etc.). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the period display pattern and the specific display pattern are executed.

(A4) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3).
The specific display is an expectation suggestion display (display of "No way? (Low expectation)", "Intense heat (high expectation)", etc. in FIG. 59) that suggests the expectation controlled by the advantageous state. It may be included (FIG. 59).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether the period display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the specific display.

(A5) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4).
A re-variation display means (for effect control) that can execute a re-variation display (pseudo-ream, etc.) that temporarily stops the variation display and then restarts the variation display from the start of the variation display to the derivation display of the display result. Further equipped with a microcomputer 90100 etc.)
The specific display may include a re-variation suggestion display suggesting that the re-variation display is executed (such as the "NEXT (pseudo-continuous suggestion)" display in FIG. 59).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay more attention to whether the period display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, the display mode of the specific display is also paid more attention. Can be made to.

(A6) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5).
Further equipped with a reach effect execution means (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, etc.) capable of executing any one of a plurality of types of reach effects.
The specific display may include a reach suggestion display suggesting the type of reach effect (display of "battle (battle reach suggestion)" shown in FIG. 59, etc.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay more attention to whether the period display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, the display mode of the specific display is also paid more attention. Can be made to.

(A7) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A6).
The period display means is used in a period from the start of the period display until the period display becomes the predetermined mode (0 seconds, etc.).
After updating the period display, the first pattern (FIG. 61) is set to the predetermined mode without going through the stop mode (freeze effect shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (c)) for stopping the update of the period display. (F) to (i) patterns, etc.) and
After updating the period display, the second pattern (FIG. 61) is set to the predetermined mode after passing through the stop mode (freeze effect shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (c)) for stopping the update of the period display. (A) to (e) patterns, etc.) may be made feasible.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the display mode of the period display in the period from the start of the period display to the predetermined mode of the period display.

(A8) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A7).
The predetermined effect executing means has a special pattern (as shown in FIG. 62, in the second region 9092) in which the period display means updates the period display again when the period display becomes the predetermined mode. When the timer display reaches 0 seconds, a special pattern in which the timed value of the timer display 9094 increases) may be executed.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the effect when the period display is in the predetermined mode.

(A9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A8).
The predetermined effect executing means can change the display mode of the period display depending on whether or not the special effect is executed in the period from the start of the period display until the period display becomes the predetermined mode. (As shown in FIG. 63, the position of the third region 9096 can be changed depending on whether or not SP reach is executed, etc.).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by considering the situation of the effect executed during the period from the start of the period display to the predetermined mode of the period display.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows the setting example of various commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of volume | volume status display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the music determination process in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the music which can be played during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the composition example of the data which can be reproduced during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a temporary display process. It is a figure which shows the production example when there is no volume change operation in super reach fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the production example when there is a volume change operation in the super reach production. It is a figure which shows the execution timing example of the volume situation display in super reach fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the execution timing example of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is performed immediately before the start or the end of the super reach effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing at the time of opening an attacker. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball number notification effect operation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the continuous change count notification operation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the music name notification operation control processing during a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of various broadcast images. It is a figure which shows an example of the Z value setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification image when the execution period of the prize ball number notification production, the cumulative prize ball number notification production, the continuous chan number notification, and the big hit middle music name notification overlap. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification image when the execution period of the probability change confirmation notification production, the prize ball number notification production, the continuous chan number notification, and the big hit middle music name notification overlap. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification image when the execution period of the error notification, the prize ball number notification production, the continuous chan number notification, and the big hit music name notification overlap. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification image when the execution period of the error notification, the probability change confirmation notification effect, the continuous change number notification, and the big hit music name notification overlap. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a figure which shows the hit type table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used for determining a fluctuation pattern in a tabular form. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer in the game control microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the area effect. It is a figure which shows the area effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the area effect execution timing determination table. It is a figure which shows the 1st area production decision table. It is a figure which shows the 2nd region production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect in the 2nd other form example. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect in 3rd other form example. It is a figure for demonstrating various effects in 4th other form example.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, 7 segments or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and are identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each have a number indicating "0" to "9", a symbol indicating "-", or a lighting pattern of each segment not limited to the number or symbol. Variable display of multiple types of special symbols composed of, etc. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

A plurality of types of special symbols variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be given a symbol number for identifying each of them. As an example, the special symbol indicating the "-" symbol may be given "0" as a symbol number, and "1" to "9" may be attached as a symbol number for a plurality of types of lighting patterns. ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game are supported. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol is variable in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas on the image display device 5. The final stop symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "deriving"). In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols is to end the variable display by displaying the identification information such as the decorative symbols as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display). .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

A first hold display unit 5HR, a second hold display unit 5HL, and an active display unit AHA are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. The first hold display unit 5HR displays the number of first special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The first special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display holdes corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The second hold display unit 5HL displays the number of second special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The second special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display holdes corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. To hold the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by doing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. Will be done.

For example, due to the occurrence of the first start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A (first start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored first special figures is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, due to the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure hold memory number is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of stored special figures of the first special figure is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1. If the number of reserved first special figures reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") when the first start prize is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied and is based on the start prize. The special figure game is invalidated, and only the prize ball may be paid out. Further, if the number of reserved second special figures reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") when the second start prize is generated, the second start condition is not satisfied and is based on the start prize. The special figure game is invalidated, and only the prize ball may be paid out.

In the first hold display unit 5HR, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display unit 5HL, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number is also particularly referred to as a total hold storage number. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory, but in particular, some of them (for example, the number of reserved memory). It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories).

The first hold display unit 5HR may be configured so that, for example, the first hold display is left-justified. The first hold display unit 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the number of hold storages of the first special figure, "4", and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the left end. , "4" may be associated with each other. When the number of hold of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display section 5HR, the hold is held in the first hold display section 5HR. At the leftmost display portion corresponding to the number "1", a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased number of first special figure hold storages. If there is another 1st hold display on the 1st hold display unit 5HR, the new 1st hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other 1st hold display is performed. Add to the part (corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). When there are a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display unit 5HR and a special figure game using the first special figure is started due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display unit 5HR While erasing (digesting) the first hold display in the leftmost display part corresponding to the hold number "1", each of the first hold displays in the other display parts corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4" is displayed. Move (shift) in the direction (left side) of the erased display part.

The second hold display unit 5HL may be configured so that, for example, the second hold display is right-justified. The second reserved storage unit 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the number of reserved storages in the second special figure, "4", and the reserved numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the right end. , "4" may be associated with each other. When the number of hold of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display section 5HL, the hold is held in the second hold display section 5HL. At the rightmost display part corresponding to the number "1", a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased number of second special figure hold storages. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL, the new second hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. Add to the part (corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). When there are a plurality of second hold displays in the second hold display unit 5HL and a special figure game using the second special figure is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display unit 5HL The second hold display in the rightmost display part corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and each of the second hold displays in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is displayed. Move (shift) in the direction (right side) of the erased display part.

The active display unit AHA displays the same effect image as the hold display or a different effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. The display on the active display unit AHA is referred to as an active display (corresponding display corresponding to the variable display). In the active display unit AHA, for example, the first reserved display unit 5HR is erased (digested) in response to the start of the special figure game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied. Active display is performed according to the hold display. Further, in the active display unit AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied, the active display unit AHA is erased (digested) by the second reserved storage unit 5HL. Active display is performed according to the second hold display. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display may have the same color and pattern. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display and the second hold display. There may be.

In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, an active display unit AHA is arranged between the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL. On the other hand, the active display unit AHA is not limited to the one arranged between the first reserved display unit 5HR and the second reserved display unit 5HL, and is arranged at an arbitrary position in the display area of the image display device 5. I just need to be there. Further, the arrangement of the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL can be arbitrarily changed, and for example, the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL may be interchanged and arranged.

A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the first reserved display unit 5HR and the second reserved display unit 5HL, or in place of the first reserved display unit 5HR and the second reserved display unit 5HL. .. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the number of special symbol hold storage can be specified on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The number of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B corresponds to, for example, the upper limit values (for example, "4") of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively (for example, 4). It is configured to include (1) LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. ) Make it open. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) through the second starting winning opening, while the expansion when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. It may be configured so that the game ball is less likely to enter (pass) than in the open state. In this way, the normal variable winning ball device 6B has a first variable state such as an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) through the second starting winning opening or an expanded open state, and the game ball cannot pass (enter). It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state where it is difficult to pass (enter).

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game medium), and the first reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value. If it is (for example, "4") or less, the first starting condition is satisfied. If a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, and the second reserved storage number is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value. The second starting condition is satisfied.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big winning door as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) It becomes easier. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol (also called "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward a gaming area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation (operation) with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 31A.

A push that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation (operation) on the member forming the upper plate, for example, at a predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the front side on the upper surface of the upper plate body by a pressing operation or the like. Button 31B is provided. The push button 31B may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back surface of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

For example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting the game ball and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the winning door.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, speakers 8L, and 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical components such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display operation of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations of the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, and the like. It has a function of determining the control content for causing an electric component for effect such as a unit to execute a predetermined effect operation.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for controlling lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. The wiring is connected. The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor. Further, a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, and the like is connected to the main board 11.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes lamp control commands used to control lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, in which the first byte represents MODE (command classification) and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data may always be "1", and the first bit of the EXT data may be set in advance so as to be "0".

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may have at least a RAM 102 built in in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 100, numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game is updatablely counted by, for example, a random number circuit 104. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, a predetermined random number value is shown in a random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100, or in a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102. Numerical data may be stored, and the CPU 103 may update the stored value periodically or irregularly so that the random value is updated.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 is configured with table data that constitutes a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals that are various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be used is stored. In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored in a rewritable manner.

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. The display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5, the random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variation data to the RAM 122, and the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the variation data in the RAM 122. A variable data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variable data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 13. Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Further, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the effect control board 12, for example, numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation is updatablely counted by a random number circuit 124, a random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the like. .. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating various effect determination random values such as a random value for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of a decorative symbol and a random value for determining a notice effect can be counted. Is controlled by.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is configured.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. Specifically, the RAM 122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. This effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit. There are a plurality of types of the effect control flag setting unit that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120 or the like. For example, the display control unit 123 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, or the like. The VDP may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is composed including and. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Electric signal) etc. are output.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a gaming ball, a predetermined hitting ball is launched based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) of a hitting ball operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the device. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening (first starting area) formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the game ball is released by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection or the like. After that, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A starts. Will be done.

Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second starting area) formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. As a result, the second starting condition is satisfied. After that, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B starts. Will be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning opening.

Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is established. After that, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derivated display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss". In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B becomes the tilt position. , Closing control or normal opening control that returns to the vertical position after a predetermined time elapses is performed.

When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, it is special. Whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. Is transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (directed symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are also referred to as left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, respectively. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the definite special that results in the variable display of the special symbol. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol.

When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes a "big hit" (specific display result), which is an advantageous specific gaming state for the player. It is controlled to the jackpot game state. That is, whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes "miss" (non-specific display result).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is "big hit", it is determined in advance in the display area of the image display device 5. A definite decorative pattern that is a combination of big hits is derived and displayed. As an example, the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", so that the jackpot combination is confirmed. It suffices if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, a period until a predetermined upper limit of opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. During the period until, a round game (also simply referred to as "round") in which the big winning opening is continuously opened is executed. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to be generated. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "2" or "15") is reached.

When the variable display result is "big hit", it suffices to include the case where the big hit type is any one of "non-probable change", "probable change", and "probable change". When the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability change", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the first state (the jackpot is open) which is advantageous for the player as a round game in the jackpot game state. A normal open round is performed with a relatively long upper limit (eg, 29.5 seconds). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable", the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (the jackpot is open) is relatively short as a round game in the jackpot game state. A short-term open round of time (eg 0.1 seconds) is performed. The jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as the first specific game state. The jackpot game state in which the short-term open round is executed is also referred to as the second specific game state.

In the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is "probability", the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state which is advantageous for the player in the short-term open round (the jackpot is opened by the jackpot door). The upper limit of the open state) is the second period (for example, 0.1 seconds) shorter than the first period in the normal open round. In the short-term opening round, the same control as in the case where the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the large winning opening is controlled to be the second period. Alternatively, when a short-term open round is executed, the number of executions of the round game is less than the number of executions of the first round (for example, "15"), which is the number of executions of the normal open round (for example, "2"). ). That is, the jackpot game state in which the short-term open round is executed is in the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) the jackpot in each round game as compared with the jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed. The change period may be at least one of the second period, which is shorter than the first period, and the second round, in which the number of round game executions is less than the first round. Just do it.

When such a short-term open round is executed, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins in the large winning opening. However, since the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds, etc.), the big hit game state in which the ball is not actually obtained (prize ball) is obtained. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state (second specific gaming state) based on the jackpot type being "probable" is the jackpot gaming state (first specific) based on the jackpot type being "non-probable" or "probable". It becomes a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the game state). In this way, based on the fact that the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability change", when the jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is reached, the first prize ball is likely to pass through the jackpot. In the changing mode, control is performed to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into a first state (open state) and a second state (closed state). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit game state in which a short-term open round is executed based on the big hit type being "probable", a special second change mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the big winning opening. Control is performed to change the variable winning ball device 7 into a first state (open state) and a second state (closed state).

The first state (open state) and the second state (closed state) of the special variable winning ball device 7 described above are the "first state" and the "second state" mentioned in the description of the volume status display process (S162) described later. It is different from "state". The "first state" described later is, for example, a gaming state other than during super reach production, or a state of waiting for customers and not displaying an error, and the "second state" described later is, for example, pachinko. In the gaming machine, it is the gaming state during the super reach production.

After the jackpot game state ends, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to a probability variation state that is higher than the normal state based on the establishment of the predetermined probability variation control condition. There is. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done. The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next jackpot game state is started, regardless of the number of times the variable display is executed. After the jackpot game state ends, the average variable display time may be controlled to a shorter time state than the normal state. In the time saving state, a predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done. As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the gaming state becomes the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability change" or "probability change", the game state becomes the probability change state after the jackpot game state ends.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous changing mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening than in the normal state. And the second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is "normal". Control to improve the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, tilt control time to control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "hit the normal figure" The normal variable winning ball device 6B is changed into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by controlling to make the normal variable winning ball device 6B longer than in the normal state and by controlling to increase the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. Just do it. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous changing mode is called high opening control (also referred to as “high base control”). By being controlled to such a probabilistic state or a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the special gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

In the image display device 5, the decorative symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state of being consistent with the jackpot combination for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to shaking, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple decorative symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the display positions being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. As a reach effect, a character image (an effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, the display mode of the background image is changed, and a moving image different from the decorative pattern is displayed. An effect operation different from changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, such as reproducing and displaying an image, may be executed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are different from the operation mode before the reach mode. The operation mode may be included in the reach effect. The reach state and its state are called the reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not a jackpot combination, a “miss” occurs and the variable display state ends.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as reach patterns) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as reliability or jackpot reliability) differs depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach effect (normal reach) and a super reach effect (super reach) are preset. Then, when the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) is higher than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. The reach effect that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach effects including a super reach that executes a specific reach effect that has a higher expectation of a big hit than other super reach.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Depending on the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, a variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed. As an example, it suffices if the variable display effect of pseudo-ream fluctuation (hereinafter, also referred to as "pseudo-ream") can be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It suffices to determine whether or not the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed in response to the determination of the variation pattern on the main board 11 side.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren", the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the fact that the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. Can be performed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 3 times) to display the effect of temporarily stopping the game until it is derived and displayed, and then changing it again (pseudo-continuous fluctuation). The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is the display of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols, excluding the initial variation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the first temporary stop of all decorative symbols. It suffices as long as the number of times the decorative pattern revariates in all areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", as an example, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chance eyes of a special combination are used. A decorative pattern that is one of the types of loss combinations is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", a predetermined effect such as an image display which is a re-variation effect may be executed along with a plurality of variation displays including the initial variation. The re-variation effect is not limited to displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 5, and may include an arbitrary effect operation using various effect devices.

As an example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, a plurality of decorative LEDs provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream". Of these, the one that is lit may be controlled to increase one by one. Further, during each variation display (including the initial variation), the display color of the decorative LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting of the plurality of decorative LEDs may change. It may be controlled by.

As a further example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, a production model provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" (including the initial variation). The movable member) may be controlled to operate. At this time, the operation mode of the effect model (movable member) may be controlled to change during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation), or among a plurality of effect models (movable members). It may be controlled so that what works with is changed.

During the period of each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", it may be controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image on the screen of the image display device 5. .. Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that is a pseudo-continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound effect that is a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition to some or all of these re-variable effects, or in place of some or all of these re-variable effects, the decorative LEDs are lit or blinking, the operation of the production model, the display of the production image, and the sound effects. Of the output of, it may be controlled to execute a re-variation effect in which a part or all of the output is combined. At this time, when the re-variation effect is executed by combining a plurality of types of effect modes, or when the re-variation effect is executed a plurality of times, as compared with the case where the re-variation effect is executed by only one type of effect mode. When the production mode in the game changes, the variable display result may become a "big hit" and be controlled to a big hit game state (big hit expectation), and a predetermined game value may be given or a game advantageous to the player. The possibility of being controlled by the state may be increased.

For example, in the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", the decorative symbol is based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-ream fluctuation (re-variation) once to three times. The variable display can be made to appear as if it was started two to four times in a row. Then, when the number of repeated executions of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) (number of pseudo-reams) increases, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" (big hit expectation) than when the number of pseudo-reams is small. It gets higher. In addition, the rate of occurrence of the effect may be controlled to change depending on the number of times the pseudo-ream variation is repeatedly executed (the number of pseudo-reams). For example, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation may be performed twice to be "reach confirmed", and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation may be performed three times to be "super reach confirmed". It should be noted that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" may be executed up to a number of times more than 1 to 3 times, for example, 4 times or 5 times.

In addition to "pseudo-ream", as variable display effects using such variable display operation of decorative patterns, for example, "slip", "development chance eye", "development chance eye end", "chance eye stop slip" Various production operations such as, may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of "slip", "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. After changing the decorative symbol in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol display area (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) is displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporarily stopped display area (for example, "left" decorative symbol display area 5L) And one or both of the decorative symbol display area 5R on the “right”), the decorative symbol is changed again and then stopped, so that the decorative symbol to be stopped is changed.

In the variable display effect of the "development chance eye", the decorations of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. After the decorative symbols constituting the development chance eyes included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set as the reach state. Reach production starts. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of "end of development chance", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". , An effect display is performed in which a predetermined combination of decorative symbols is derived and displayed as a final decorative symbol as a development chance eye. In the variable display effect of "slip after stopping the chance", as in the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. , "Left", "Middle", "Right" Decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of the lost combination (special combination) that is a pseudo-continuous chance eye in all Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren", which changes the decorative pattern again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern changes again in a part of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display is performed in which the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is changed.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream", for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying an image as a message, or outputting a voice, etc. Due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state, the reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is ". A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of becoming a "big hit".

The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed (started) before the reach mode is reached (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right"). Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. In this way, the advance notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol which is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell sex will do. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance according to the content (effect mode) of the effect operation when the advance notice effect is executed.

The advance notice effect includes a look-ahead advance notice effect (also referred to as a look-ahead effect). In the look-ahead notice effect, the variable display result is "big hit" according to the effect mode before the variable display is executed, which is the target (notice target) for which the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" is announced. It is a notice production that can announce the possibility of becoming. In particular, the pre-reading advance notice effect that continuously gives advance notice over the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special figure games is also referred to as a continuous advance notice effect. In the look-ahead notice effect, before the variable display to be notified is started, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is announced based on, for example, the hold memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start prize. The production operation for this is started. In contrast to the look-ahead notice effect, the notice effect whose execution is started after the variable display to be notified is started is called a single notice effect (also referred to as a single notice, the variable notice, or a variable display during notice effect). Will be done.

As an example of the look-ahead notice effect, the display portion of the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR and the display portion of the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL are displayed in a display mode different from the display mode in the normal state. By changing to, a pre-reading notice effect of "hold display change" that warns the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display to be noticed may be executed. More specifically, the display color in the display portion for displaying the special figure reserved memory number in a identifiable manner is a specific color (for example, red, green, or blue) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) in the normal state. By doing so, it is sufficient to be able to notify that the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than usual. In addition, by setting the display pattern in the first hold display and the second hold display to a specific pattern (for example, Sakura pattern) different from the normal one, the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than usual. May be able to be notified. Alternatively, by setting the display mode to show a predetermined message (for example, "secret") as the first hold display or the second hold display, it is notified that the display color is more likely to change to a specific color (for example). Suggestion) You may be able to do it. A hold display that suggests that such a display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of "hold display change" is also referred to as a hold display change effect.

Further, as an example of the independent notice effect, by changing the display of the effect image on the active display unit AHA to a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, it is possible to obtain a "big hit" in the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied. A notice effect of "active display change" that gives notice of sex or the like may be executed. More specifically, by setting the display color on the active display unit AHA to a specific color (for example, red, green, or blue) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) in the normal state, the variable display result can be obtained. It suffices to be able to notify that the possibility of becoming a "big hit" is higher than usual. The notice effect of "active display change" is also referred to as an active display change effect.

When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" ("normal"). It includes a case where the variable display mode is "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") and a case where the variable display mode is "reach loss". When the variable display mode is "non-reach", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state, and a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that does not reach the reach (non-reach). Reach combination) is displayed (derived) as a stop. When the variable display mode is "reach", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and finally the jackpot combination is A combination of predetermined decorative symbols (reach combination) that does not become a stop display (derivation) is displayed. The decorative symbols constituting the non-reach combination and the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol which is the lost symbol.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 101 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like. It includes processing to control the progress of.

The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by software.

As an example, the game random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. It suffices if the random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result is included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types such as "non-probability", "probability", and "probability" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used for the purpose. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of prepared patterns. The random number value MR5 for determining the normal figure display result is in a closed state (normally open) of the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B with the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal figure game as "per normal figure". It is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the open state (expanded open state) in which the game ball easily passes (enters) more frequently than the state).

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is displayed on the special symbol display device 4. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the operation and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20, and sets the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation of the movable wing piece on the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It is a process that enables. In the normal symbol process processing, as a high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and each time. Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol will be "per normal" in the normal game, and the normal variable winning ball device based on the variable display result being "per normal" A part or all of control is performed in which the tilt control time for tilting the movable wing piece in 6B is made longer than in the normal state, and the number of tilts is increased as in the normal state.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the effect control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal to turn the effect control INT signal on for a predetermined time and then turn it off. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit, etc.). And execute.

FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S101 of FIG. 3 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first starts based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the first special figure by reading the first hold storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first hold storage number counter provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. The buffer value is set to "1" (step S203).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on ( Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the second special figure by reading the second hold storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second hold storage number counter provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to "2" (step S206).

After executing any of the processes of steps S203 and S206, the hold storage count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be added by 1 (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). In this way, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to increase by 1, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to increase by 1. .. At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined from the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210).

In the process of step S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is held. The data is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first start winning is generated, but has not yet started. The special figure game) using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is stored as a hold memory. In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, and the second starting winning is generated, but the special drawing game has not been started yet. (Special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored as a hold memory.

The first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game balls) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and is based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are stored as pending data. Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ), Whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state, which of the multiple jackpot types is used when the variable display result is "big hit", and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example) It is a hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a reach effect of super reach.

The second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and is based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are stored as pending data. Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ), Whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state, which of the plurality of jackpot types is used when the variable display result is "big hit", and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example). It is a hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a reach effect of super reach.

Following the process of step S210, a setting for transmitting a start port winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is made (step S211). Subsequently, the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed (step S212). After that, the setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is made (step S213). Further, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S215), and then the start prize is won. The judgment process ends. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S216). The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S212 of FIG. 4 as the winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, in the special symbol normal processing (steps S110 and FIG. 8 of FIG. 3) described later, the special symbol display result is set as a “big hit” and the jackpot game state. It is decided whether or not to control it, and the fluctuation pattern is decided. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 performs the winning random number value determination process in step S212 at the starting winning timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). By executing this, it is determined whether or not the random value MR1 is determined to derive the jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, and the random value MR3 determined as the variable pattern that sets the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state. Judgment as to whether or not it is. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the starting winning opening is started, whether or not the special symbol display result becomes a "big hit" and the decoration Whether or not to reach the reach state during the variable display of the symbol is predicted, and based on this prediction result, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect which is the look-ahead effect by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side. Can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102, for example, to perform a pachinko game. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (step S401). More specifically, when the probability change flag is on, the game state is the probability change state, when the probability change flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, the game state is the time reduction state, and both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state. Further, by checking the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag control unit, etc.), it is possible to determine whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state. I just need to be able to identify it.

The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state thus specified is in the jackpot gaming state (step S402). At this time, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress, it is further determined whether or not the high base is in the high open control accompanying the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S403). When it is determined in step S402 that the jackpot is being hit (step S402; Yes), or when it is determined in step S403 that the base is high (step S403; Yes), the start port buffer value is "2". (Step S404).

When it is determined in step S403 that the base is not high (step S403; No), or when it is determined in step S404 that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S404; Yes), FIG. Various variable display contents are determined using the random number values extracted in the process of step S209 shown in (step S405). In this embodiment, the variable display contents to be determined at the time of starting winning include "big hit", "super reach confirmation at the time of loss", "reach confirmation at the time of loss", and "general at the time of loss".

The CPU 101 sets a jackpot determination range in order to determine whether or not the variable display content is a "big hit". For example, from the specific display result determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, data used for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state (table data for determining the special figure display result). ) Is selected. In the table data for determining the special figure display result, the range of the determined value to which the special figure display result is assigned to the "big hit" may be set as the big hit determination range. This jackpot determination range is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in the process of step S209. At this time, if the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, the variable display content is determined to be "big hit".

When it is determined that the variable display content is not "big hit" in response to the random value MR1 being outside the range of the big hit determination range, the super reach confirmation range and reach confirmation range at the time of loss are set. The super reach confirmation range and reach confirmation range at the time of loss are random values that can be determined as fluctuation patterns with reach effects including super reach or normal reach regardless of the number of special figure reserved memories (random value for determining fluctuation pattern). The range of the numerical value MR3) may be predetermined.

When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, it is prepared in advance by using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern and the variation pattern determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern used in this variable display is determined from the plurality of fluctuation patterns. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to any of the plurality of fluctuation patterns. The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern to which the determination value matching the random number value MR3 is assigned as the variation pattern used in the present variable display. For example, in the variation pattern determination table used at the time of loss when the variable display result is "loss", the allocation of the determination values for a plurality of variation patterns is the first special feature as shown in FIGS. 11 (B1) and 11 (B2). It differs depending on the number of reserved storages in the figure and the number of stored storages in the second special figure. However, some of the determined values are assigned to the same (or the same type) fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of first special figure reserved storage and the second special figure reserved storage number. In the table data constituting such a fluctuation pattern determination table, among the determination values assigned to the fluctuation pattern with super reach, the range of the determination values assigned to the fluctuation pattern with super reach regardless of the number of special figure reserved storages. However, it suffices if it is predetermined as a super reach determination range. Further, in the table data constituting the variation pattern determination table, among the determination values assigned to the variation patterns with reach effect including normal reach, they are assigned to the variation pattern with reach effect regardless of the number of special figure reserved storages. The range of the determined value may be predetermined as the reach determination range.

FIG. 6 shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss when the variable display result is “loss”. When the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state without time reduction control, a fluctuation pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 11 (B1) are assigned to the variation patterns is used. In this case, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", it is determined that the fluctuation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of stored memory in the first special figure. .. On the other hand, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "271" to "300", it is uncertain whether or not superreach is involved according to the number of reserved memory of the first special figure. , It is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect including the normal reach is determined regardless of at least the number of reserved memories of the first special figure.

Further, during the time reduction in which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variation state accompanied by a time reduction control or a time reduction state, a variation pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 11 (B2) are assigned to the variation patterns is used. Be done. In this case, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", it is determined that the fluctuation pattern with superreach is determined regardless of the number of the second special figure reserved memory. .. On the other hand, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "289" to "300", it is determined that the fluctuation pattern with normal reach is determined regardless of the number of stored memory in the second special figure. ..

The number of special figure reservations (the number of first special figure reservations, the number of second special figure reservations) when the start winning is generated does not match the number of special figure reservations when the variable display is actually started. Not limited to this, it may change due to the execution of variable display or the occurrence of a new start prize after the start prize has occurred. Therefore, the table data selected may not match due to the difference in the number of reserved special figures between the judgment result at the start winning and the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the variable display. It is generally difficult to determine and predict whether or not it will be decided. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "missing", at least the determination value assigned to the variation pattern with super reach or the variation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is determined. Special figure Contains a common decision value regardless of the number of reserved memories. Therefore, regardless of whether or not it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach is determined regardless of the number of special figure reserved memories at the start winning prize or the start of variable display in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the reach effect including the normal reach It can be determined whether or not it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by is determined.

When the variable display result is "missing" in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", the variable display content Is determined to be "super reach confirmed at the time of loss", and if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "271" to "300", the variable display content is "reach confirmed at the time of loss". judge. If the variable display result is "missing" during the time reduction control, if the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", the variable display content Is determined to be "super reach confirmed at the time of loss", and if the random number knowledge MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "289" to "300", the variable display content is "reach confirmed at the time of loss". judge.

When it is determined in step S404 shown in FIG. 5 that the starting port buffer value is "1" instead of "2" (step S404; No), a setting for limiting the winning determination in the process of step S405 is set. (Step S406). In this way, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed or when the big hit game state is performed, it is based on the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening. Limit the variable display content so that it is not judged. As a result, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start is performed during high opening control or in the big hit game state. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by restricting the pre-reading notice based on the winning from being executed.

After that, the notification content at the time of starting winning is set according to the determination result by the process of step S405 and the setting by the process of step S406 (step S407). According to the content of the notification, the setting for transmitting the winning determination result command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is made (step S408), and then the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

FIG. 7A shows a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command and a second starting opening winning designation command), a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command, and second hold storage number notification command). Command), the setting example of the judgment result command at the time of winning is shown. In this embodiment, a command B100H as a first starting opening winning designation command and a command B200H as a second starting opening winning designation command are prepared in advance as starting opening winning designation commands. The subscript H indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, as the hold storage number notification command, the command C1XXH which is the first hold storage number notification command and the command C2XXH which is the second hold storage number notification command are prepared in advance. It should be noted that XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the hold storage number notification command, different EXT data (for example, any of 00H to 04H) is set according to the special figure hold storage number. Further, a command C4XXXH, which is a winning determination result command, is prepared in advance.

When a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, the step shown in FIG. When it is determined in the process of S202 that the number of reserved first special figures has not reached the upper limit value, the first start condition is satisfied. The first start condition is a condition for executing a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to "1" in the process of step S203 shown in FIG. 4, and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S211 to perform the effect control board from the main board 11. The first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. Further, by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. 5, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, when the start port buffer value is "1", the transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. 4 is performed, so that the first reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Will be done.

When a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, it is shown in FIG. When it is determined in the process of step S205 that the number of reserved second special figure has not reached the upper limit value, the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to "2" in the process of step S206 shown in FIG. 4, and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S211. A second start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. Further, by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. 5, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. Will be done.

On the side of the effect control board 12, the establishment of the first starting condition can be detected by receiving the first start opening winning designation command, and the establishment of the second starting condition can be detected by receiving the second starting opening winning designation command. it can. As described above, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The winning determination result command is the first start winning, which is the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening, or the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening. At the time of the second start winning, the comparison result (winning judgment result) using the game random number (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result) extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like is sent to the effect control board 12 side. Notify. The first reserved storage number notification command notifies the first special figure reserved storage number. The second reserved storage number notification command notifies the second special figure reserved storage number. In this embodiment, in the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, the game ball passes (enters) either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and the starting winning is won. In addition to notifying whether it has occurred, it is transmitted as hold notification information for specifying which of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number has increased.

The first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command correspond to the execution of the special figure game being started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be sent. Alternatively, when the number of reserved storages increases, the 1st special figure reserved storage number or the 2nd special figure reserved storage number increases, and the reserved storage number addition designation command (1st reserved storage number addition designation command or 2nd While sending the hold storage number addition specification command), when the hold storage number decreases, the hold storage number subtraction specification command (No. 1) indicates that the hold storage number of the first special figure or the second special figure hold storage number has decreased. 1) Hold storage number subtraction designation command or second hold storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted. A total hold memory notification command that notifies the total hold memory number in place of the first hold memory number notification command or the second hold memory number notification command, or together with the first hold memory number notification command or the second hold memory number notification command. May be sent. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

FIG. 7B exemplifies the content of notification by the winning determination result command. Of the winning determination result commands shown in FIG. 7B, the command C402H, command C203H, and command C404H may be transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range. , The variable display result is determined to be "missing", and the winning judgment result that the jackpot game state is not controlled is notified. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" and controlled to the jackpot gaming state at the time of winning. Notify the judgment result (variable display content is "big hit"). The command C402H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss, and the determination result at the time of winning (variable display content) that the fluctuation pattern with super reach is determined at the time of loss. Will notify you of "Super reach confirmed at the time of loss"). The command C403H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range at the time of loss, and the determination result at the time of winning (the variable display content is determined to be the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect at the time of loss). "Reach confirmed when lost") is notified. The command C404H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range, and at the time of winning that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect may not be determined. Notify the judgment result (variable display content is "general when lost"). In this way, the winning judgment result command uses the game random numbers extracted at the time of starting winning to determine whether or not the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" or whether or not it is determined in a specific fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted as judgment result information for notifying the judgment result at the time of winning.

The special symbol normal processing of step S110 shown in FIG. 3 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or the like is based on the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the first special symbol reservation storage unit and the second special symbol reservation storage unit. The second special symbol display device 4B determines whether or not to start the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the variable display result determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Derived Determined (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, if the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types. The jackpot type is stored by storing the data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the fixed special symbol (big hit symbol,) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B corresponds to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Any of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a pre-determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set in advance according to the variable pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol that is the variable display result is determined. Further, the variable pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" when the variable display result is "missing". Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to "reach" by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result becomes "missing" in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to start the variation of the special symbol. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process of setting the special symbol to be varied in the special symbol display device 4, a process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the like. .. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 4 and setting to stop and display the confirmed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the hit start specification command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state based on the special figure display result being "big hit" is set to be transmitted, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to ". Update to 4 ”. If the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be in the open state, etc. It is included. When the jackpot release preprocessing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this jackpot opening post-processing, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the jackpot is open has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "2" or "15" depending on the jackpot type). Processing to be performed, processing to wait until the next round game is started when the maximum number of times has not been reached, and the like are included. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Is updated to.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end processing, a waiting period corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes a process of waiting until the time elapses and a process of making various settings for controlling the probabilistic state and the time saving state according to the success or failure of the probabilistic control condition. Then, when the setting for controlling the probability change state or the time saving state is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of the second special figure reserved storage is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; No), it is stored in the head area (storage area corresponding to the hold number "1") of the second special figure reserved storage unit. Numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read out as the reserved data (step S232). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize (second start prize) at the second start prize opening in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 4 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102, is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0". As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of reserved second special figures is "0", and the number of reserved first special figures is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, when the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls pass (enter) the start winning opening regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first The start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is associated with the hold number in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 together with the hold data or separately from the hold data. It suffices to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are satisfied for the special figure game corresponding to each reserved data.

Following the process of step S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined to be either "big hit" or "miss" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a table used for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "loss". , Should be assigned. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the random number buffer for variation.

In the process of step S239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability change state and the probability change control is performed, the special figure is at a higher rate than when the probability change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state. The display result is determined to be a "big hit". The probabilistic change state is started by setting the probabilistic change flag to the on state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is either "probability change" or "probability change" by, for example, the big hit end process of step S117 shown in FIG. Will be done. In the probabilistic state, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and the big hit game state is more likely to occur than when the probabilistic change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

The CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is a "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit, etc.) is set to the on state (step S241). .. Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set as a table used for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value for determining the jackpot type is a plurality of jackpot types depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. It suffices if it is assigned to the decision result of which type to use. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type read from the variable random number buffer.

After executing the process of step S242, the jackpot type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102.

When the special symbol display result is not "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; No), or after the processing of step S243 is executed, the final special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined. (Step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special symbol display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a final special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is "big hit", any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. It may be decided as a definite special symbol.

After executing the process of step S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (step S245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" in step S245, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S246), the special symbol Ends normal processing. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 3 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). Then, when the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is "big hit" is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step S261; No), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result becomes "loss" is determined (step S263).

In the process of step S262, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined by using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101, for example. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result becomes "big hit" by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined. Further, in the process of step S263, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined by using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the loss fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result becomes "miss" by referring to the loss fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined.

FIG. 10 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "missing", the variable display state of the decorative symbol is "non-reach", which is not the reach state, and "the reach state". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case of "reach" and the case where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "big hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is "non-reach" is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is "reach" is , It is called a reach fluctuation pattern (also called a reach loss fluctuation pattern). The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect in the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect in the super reach is executed.

FIG. 11 shows an example of determining a jackpot fluctuation pattern and a loss fluctuation pattern. In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 9, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined at a ratio as shown in FIG. 11 (A). In the example shown in FIG. 11 (A), the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-3 are determined as the usage patterns at the ratio shown in FIG. 11 (A) as the fluctuation patterns at the time of a big hit. In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 9, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 11 (B1), for example, in the normal time when the time saving control is not performed. Further, in the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 9, when the time saving control is being performed during the time saving, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a ratio as shown in FIG. 11 (B2), for example. In the process of step S263, by determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, when the variable display result becomes "loss", it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state. It should be noted that, by a process separate from the determination of the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not to reach the reach state when the variable display result becomes "missing".

In the example shown in FIG. 11 (A), the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach such as the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 to PB3-3 is the reach in the normal reach such as the fluctuation pattern PA3-1. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the effect. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11 (B1) and 11 (B2), the determination values assigned to the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach, such as the fluctuation pattern PA2-1, are the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2. It is set to be more than the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach such as -3. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 11 (B1), determination values assigned to different fluctuation patterns are included depending on whether the number of reserved first special figures is 0, 1, or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of "159" to "180" is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 if the number of stored first special figures is 0, and the number of stored stored first special figures is 1. If, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-2, and if the number of stored first special figures is 2 or more, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be changed according to the number of the first special symbol reserved storages. In particular, when the number of reserved first special figures is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time should be shorter than when the number of reserved first special figures is less than a predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determined value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that In the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the first special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as in. Alternatively, regardless of the number of the second special figure reserved storage when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number at that time is referred to. , The fluctuation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, FIG. 11 ( The fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data to which the determination value is assigned differently from B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the "first special figure reserved storage number" shown in FIG. 11 (B1) is read as "the second special figure reserved storage number". The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the number of reserved storages in the second special figure.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 11 (B2), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the number of reserved second special figures is 0, 1, or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be changed according to the number of the second special symbol reserved storage. In particular, when the number of reserved second special figures is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time is shorter than when the number of reserved second special figures is less than a predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determined value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that During the time reduction control, the game ball easily passes (enters) the second start winning opening, and the special figure game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is shortened. There is a high possibility that it will be executed, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. Then, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the number of stored second special figures is 0. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the first special figure reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as in. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data in which the allocation of the determination values is different from that in FIG. 11 (B2) regardless of the number of the first special figure reserved storage. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the "second special figure reserved storage number" shown in FIG. 11 (B2) is read as "the first special figure reserved storage number". The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the number of reserved storages in the first special figure.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262 and S263, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is set (step S264). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 10, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processes of steps S262 and S263. By setting the special symbol fluctuation time, the CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived.

Following the process of step S264, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S265). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

After executing the process of step S265, the command transmission setting at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol is performed (step S266). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, and the first from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification commands, the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a second from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification commands, the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified.

The first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command use the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command that specifies the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The variable pattern specification command is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

After executing the process of step S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S267), and then the variation pattern setting process ends. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 12 will be described.

In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process shown in FIG. 12 as an example. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S51), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and has a CTC mounted on the effect control board 12 (step S51). Set the register of the counter / timer circuit). After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S52). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control signal that serves as an effect control command is selected from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. To capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on (step S52; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off, and the command analysis process is executed (step S54). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. In the command analysis process, for example, when there is a receive command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined which effect control command is received by checking the MODE data of the receive command.

Following the command analysis process, the error notification process (step S55) is executed. In the error notification processing, for example, under the control of the effect control CPU 120, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Output it.

Following the error notification process, the effect control process process is executed (step S56). In the effect control process processing, various operations such as display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operation in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the like. Regarding the control content of the effect operation using the effect device, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. Following the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed (step S57), and as various random number values used for the effect control, numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 is generated by software. Update. After executing the effect random number update process, the process returns to the process of step S52.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S54 of FIG. 12 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not there is a receive command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. Is determined (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a receive command in step S501 (step S501; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is a jackpot start designation command (step S502). ). Then, when the command is the jackpot start designation command (step 502; YES), the command is updated so that the continuous chan count value K is added by 1 (step S503), and then the process returns to the process of step S501. The continuous chan count value K is a stored value of the continuous chan count counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and may indicate the number of consecutive chans. Here, in the continuous chan, it is executed a predetermined time that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" in the probabilistic state or the time saving state and is controlled to the probabilistic state or the time saving state even after the end of the big hit game state. Say that. In addition, the number of consecutive chans means that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and is continuously controlled to the probabilistic changing state or the time saving state even after the end of the big hit game state. The number of times.

If the reception command is not the jackpot start designation command in step S502 (step S502; NO), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the jackpot winning designation command (step S504). Then, when the command is for the large prize opening prize designation command (step S504; YES), the prize ball count value is updated to be added by 15 (step S505). The prize ball count value is a stored value of a prize ball counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and may indicate the number of prize balls. Here, the number of prize balls means the number of game balls paid out for winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit.

After executing the process of step S505, the cumulative prize ball count value is updated to be added by 15 (step S506), and then the process returns to the process of step S501. The cumulative prize ball count value is a stored value of the cumulative prize ball counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and may indicate the cumulative prize ball number. Here, the cumulative number of prize balls refers to the number of game balls paid out for winning a prize at the big prize opening during the big hit during the consecutive chan. In addition, both the number of prize balls and the cumulative number of prize balls can be calculated as the number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit, including the number of prizes paid out for the first and second starting prize openings and the general prize openings. Good. Further, if it is not a big hit (unless the value of the effect process flag is any of 3 to 5), it is not necessary to add the prize ball count value and the cumulative prize ball count value.

If the reception command is not the big prize opening prize designation command in step S504 (step S504; NO), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the big hit end designation command (step S507). Then, when it is a jackpot end designation command (step S507; YES), by clearing the prize ball number counter, the count value is initialized to "0" (step S508), and the process returns to step S501.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls for each detection. Then, 15 is added to the prize ball count value, and the count value is initialized to "0" in response to the end of the current jackpot game state, so that the jackpot game state is controlled. Each time, the number of game balls paid out for winning a prize in the big winning opening during the big hit is counted.

If the reception command is not the jackpot end designation command in step S507 (step S507; NO), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a game state designation command (step S509). Then, when it is a game state designation command (step S509; YES), it is determined whether or not the time saving control ends based on the received game state designation command (step S510). Then, when the time saving control ends (step S510; YES), the count value is initialized to "0" by clearing the cumulative prize ball number counter (step S511).

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening during the consecutive chan, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls for each detection. In response to this, 15 cumulative prize ball count values are added, and in response to the end of the consecutive chan, the count value is initialized to "0", so that the continuous chan is in progress. The number of game balls paid out for winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit is counted.

After executing the process of step S511, by clearing the continuous chan count counter, the count value is initialized to "0" (step S512), and the process returns to the process of step S501.

As described above, in this embodiment, the count value K for the number of consecutive chans is incremented by 1 each time the jackpot game state is controlled, and the count value K is set to "corresponding to the end of the time saving control." By initializing to "0", the number of consecutive chans is counted.

If the reception command is not a game state designation command in step S509 (step S507; NO), settings are made according to other reception commands (step S513), and then the process returns to step S501.

In the above, an example of clearing the continuous chan count counter immediately after the time reduction control is completed (step S512) has been shown, but within a specific period (for example, after returning to the low probability low base state) after the continuous chan end. , Within 20 rotations), if the jackpot is hit again, the number of consecutive chans may be taken over.

In the command analysis process, for example, when (i) a winning determination result command and a first reserved storage number notification command are received together with the first starting port winning designation command, a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, an effect control buffer setting) is received. Among the free areas in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, which is provided in the part), etc., the first start opening prize designation command and the first hold storage number notification command are placed in the storage area having the smallest hold display number as the buffer number. In order, or (ii) when the second start opening winning designation command and the second hold storage number notification command are received, the second start provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control buffer setting unit) or the like. Among the free areas in the command buffer at the time of winning, the storage area having the smallest hold display number, which is the buffer number, is also controlled to store the second start opening winning designation command and the second hold storage number notification command in order. It is said.

The command buffer at the time of the first start winning is associated with a set of effect control commands (first start opening winning designation command and first hold storage number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. A storage area is reserved so that it can be stored. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the first start prize occurs in the storage areas corresponding to the hold display numbers "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the first start prize according to the reception order. Store in order from the beginning of the free area in. The hold display number in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning is corresponding to the number of hold storages of the first special figure.

The command buffer at the time of the second start winning is associated with a set of effect control commands (second start opening winning designation command and second hold storage number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start winning. A storage area is reserved so that it can be stored. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the second start prize occurs in the storage areas corresponding to the hold display numbers "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the second start prize according to the reception order. Store in order from the beginning of the free area in. The hold display number in the command buffer at the time of winning the second start corresponds to the number of hold storages of the second special figure.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S55 of FIG. 12 as the error notification process. In this error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the error notification notification period based on, for example, a notification control pattern (step S141).

If it is not the error notification notification period in step S141 (step S141; NO), it is determined whether or not the magnetic anomaly notification designation command has been received (step S142). At this time, if the magnetic anomaly notification designation command is not received (step S142; NO), the error notification process ends.

When the magnetic anomaly notification designation command is received in step S142 (step S142; YES), the error notification process ends after the operation control for executing the error notification is performed in the uppermost layer (step S143). To do. Further, even when the error notification notification period is set in step S141 (step S141; YES), the error notification process is performed after the operation control for executing the error notification is performed in the uppermost layer (step S143). finish. For example, in the process of step S143, various commands are issued in order to execute error notification in a predetermined notification mode according to the notification control execution data read from the notification control pattern or the like prepared in advance for executing error notification. It may be created and transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, error notification is executed, for example, an error notification image as shown in FIG. 34 (A) is displayed on the uppermost layer.

The error notification image shown in FIG. 34 (A) corresponds to the detection of an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the winning opening using a magnet, and the message "Error occurred! Please call the staff." The character image MM1 for notifying the above and the pictogram image AR1 for notifying that an error has occurred are included. The pictogram image AR1 may be displayed in a predetermined display mode corresponding to the error notification. The display time of the error notification image (error notification notification period) may be, for example, 30 seconds. The display time of the error notification image may be different depending on the type of error.

In the present embodiment, an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image for a probability change confirmation notification effect as a third notification to notify that a predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied, and a prize ball during a jackpot as a specific period. The prize ball number notification production image for the prize ball number notification effect as the first notification to notify the number of prize balls paid out as, and the consecutive chan for notification of the number of consecutive chans as the fourth notification to notify the number of consecutive chans. Images for other effects such as the number-of-times notification image and the big hit middle song name notification image for notifying the name of the song being played during the big hit as the fifth notification are arranged on different layers. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35 (A), an image is superimposed on each image data on the error notification image, the probability change confirmation notification effect image, the prize ball number notification effect image, and other effects images. The Z value used for drawing is set, and the RAM 122 that provides the work area of the effect control CPU 120 includes an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image, a prize ball number notification effect image, and the like. A Z value setting table for setting the Z value of the image data of the image for the effect of is stored. In this Z value setting table, Z values used when drawing an image are registered in association with each image data item.

As shown in FIG. 35 (B), an image having a small Z value is drawn on the front side, and an image having a large Z value is drawn on the back side. That is, the image having a small Z value is drawn so as to overlap the image having a large Z value, and the image having a small Z value is preferentially displayed. That is, the image having a small Z value can be visually recognized as if it is on the front side for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35 (A), the Z value of the error notification image is set to "0", the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to "1", and the prize ball. The Z value of the number notification effect image is set to "2", and the Z value of other production images such as the continuous chan number notification image and the big hit middle song name notification image is set to "3" and registered. That is, when executing the effect processing at the time of opening the attacker, which will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 preferentially displays the prize ball number notification effect image over the continuous chan number notification image and the big hit middle song name notification image, and the prize ball. Control is performed so that the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is preferentially displayed over the number notification effect image, and the error notification image is preferentially displayed over the probability variation confirmation notification effect image.

It should be noted that the Z value of "2" is set not only for the prize ball number notification effect image, but also for notifying the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit during the consecutive chan as a special period. The Z value of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image for the cumulative prize ball number notification effect as the second notification is also set to "2". Furthermore, not only the error notification image, the probability change confirmation notification production image, the prize ball number notification production image, the cumulative prize ball number notification production image, the consecutive chan number notification image, the big hit song name notification image, but also the background image as the background The Z value is also set, and in these background images and the like, a Z value larger than that of the continuous-changing number of times notification image and the big hit middle song name notification image is set.

Further, the priority of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be subdivided. For example, when it is the first hit (that is, when the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed for the first hit) and when it is a continuous chan (that is, the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed for the second and subsequent consecutive chans). The Z value of the probabilistic confirmation notification effect image may be different from that of the case. Further, the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be different depending on the number of consecutive channels. It should be noted that the display mode (design, wording, etc.) of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be different depending on whether it is the first hit or the consecutive chan (and the number of consecutive chans).

Further, the priority of the prize ball number notification effect image may be subdivided. For example, the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image may be different depending on whether the number of prize balls is "2000" or "2400". The display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the prize ball number notification effect image may be different depending on whether the number of prize balls is "2000" or "2400".

Further, the priority of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image may be subdivided. For example, the Z value of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image may be different depending on whether the cumulative number of prize balls is "5000" or "10000". The display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image may be different depending on whether the number of prize balls is "5000" or "10000".

In addition, the priority of the continuous change number notification image may be subdivided. For example, the Z value of the continuous chan count notification image may be different depending on the number of consecutive chan number consecutive chan count notification images. It should be noted that the display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the continuous-chan count notification image may be different depending on the number of consecutive-chans.

In addition, the priority of the music name notification image during the big hit may be subdivided. For example, the Z value of the music name notification image during the jackpot may be different depending on the music (type of the music, the number of times the music is played today, etc.). In addition, the display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the music name notification image during the big hit may be different depending on the music.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 executes the volume status display process (step S162) and the jackpot middle music determination process (step S163), and then steps S170 to S170 according to the value of the effect process flag. Perform any of the processes of step S175. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Variable display start waiting process (step S170): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171).

Variable display start setting process (step S171): Control is performed so that the decorative symbol (effect symbol) starts to fluctuate. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display.

Variable display during effect processing (step S172): Controls the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, and monitors the end of the fluctuation time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all the symbols, the variation of the effect symbols is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. .. The value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173).

Special figure hit waiting process (step S173): After the end of the fluctuation time, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the effect process (step S174) when the attacker is open.

Effect processing when the attacker is open (step S174): Control during the jackpot game. For example, when the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening or the designated command after opening the large winning opening is received, the display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step S175).

Ending effect processing (step S175): In the image display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170).

In the effect control process process, the hold display setting process may be executed before the execution of steps S170 to S175. In this hold display setting process, for example, when the first start prize or the second start prize occurs, the first hold display on the first hold display unit 5HR or the second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HL occurs. Processing, determination processing, setting processing, etc. for executing the pre-reading advance notice effect of "hold display change" by using, for example, the storage data of the hold display data storage unit provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 121. including.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a volume as an example of effect adjustment related to the game according to the movement of the player (for example, based on the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player) as described below. It can be adjusted. That is, the volume from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player.

In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the volume status display process (step S162). The volume status display process includes a process for displaying the adjustment status of the volume adjustment. Specifically, in the volume status display processing, whether or not the player operates the stick controller 31A or the like in a game state other than during the super reach effect, or in a state where an error is not displayed (first state) such as in a customer waiting state. Regardless of, the process for visually displaying the volume status display image VL (see FIGS. 24 (A), 25 (A), etc.) indicating the adjustment status of the volume adjustment on the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. I'm out.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S162 of FIG. 15 as the volume status display process. In the volume status display process shown in FIG. 16, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the super reach effect is in progress (step S601). In the process of step S601, for example, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation is a super reach fluctuation pattern and is a reach effect period.

If the super reach effect is not being produced in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S602). The super reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach effect. The data indicating the on state or the off state of the super reach operation flag is stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

If the super reach operation flag is not set to the ON state in step S602 (step S602; No), display control for displaying the volume status display on the image display device 5 is executed (step S603). As a result, as the volume status display, as shown in FIG. 24, the volume status display image VL showing the current volume output level is displayed on the image display device 5. For example, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the volume status display image VL has five rectangular image display sections arranged side by side, and the amount corresponding to the current volume in the image display section. The image is displayed in a mode in which only (three in FIG. 24A) are lit from the left end.

Specifically, when the volume is at a predetermined lowest level (the volume output is a bass level suppressed more than usual and not a muffling level), the image display is in a mode in which all five image display sections are turned off. The lowest level may be the muffling level. Further, in the case of the first level, which is one higher than the lowest level, the image display is in a mode in which the leftmost image display section is lit. In the case of the second level, which is one larger than the first level, the image display is in a mode in which two image display sections are lit from the left end. In the case of the third level (that is, the normal level), which is one larger than the second level, the image display is in a mode in which three image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of the fourth level, which is one larger than the third level, the image display is in a mode in which four image display sections from the left end are lit. Further, in the case of the maximum level (fifth level), the image display is in a mode in which all five image display sections are lit. In this way, the player can grasp the current volume output level by looking at the volume status display image VL. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL is a meter-type display mode, but the display mode is not limited to this, and a mathematical expression display mode using numbers or numerical values or a color-type display mode (for example, blue → green) is used. Various display modes may be used, such as changing in the order of → yellow → red, and indicating that the larger the color, the larger the display).

If the super reach operation flag is set (on state) in step S602 (step S602; Yes), display control for continuing the volume status display (display of the volume status display image VL) on the image display device 5. Is executed (step S604), and the operation flag at the time of super reach is reset to the off state (step S605). As shown in FIG. 27 (C) described later, steps S604 and S605 are processes for continuing the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect. As a result, the volume status display image VL displayed by performing the volume change operation immediately before the end of the super reach effect can be continuously displayed even after the end of the super reach effect, and once at the end timing of the super reach effect. It can be prevented from being erased.

After executing the process of step S603 or after executing the process of step S605, it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S606). When there is a volume change operation (step S606; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S607). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (step S606; Yes), the image display device 5 is displayed to display the changed volume status display image VL. Along with executing the control, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume setting such as controlling the voice control board 13 so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed (step). S607).

For example, the stick controller 31A can be operated in the left-right direction, and when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, the changed volume status display image VL in which the lighting mode of the image display section is increased by one is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 5, and the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one level. On the contrary, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once to the left, the changed volume status display image VL in which the lighting mode of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 5. , The volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered by one level.

After executing the process of step S607, it is determined whether or not the operation flag other than super reach is set to the ON state (step S608). The non-super reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A at a time other than during the super reach effect. The data indicating the on state or the off state of the operation flag other than the super reach is stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

On the other hand, when there is no volume change operation (step S606; No), it is determined whether or not the operation flag at times other than super reach is set to the ON state (step S609).

After executing the process of step S608, or when the operation flag other than super reach is set to the ON state in step S609 (step S609; Yes), a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation. Whether or not it is determined (step S610). When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S610; Yes), the operation flag at times other than super reach is reset to the off state (step S611). The predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation may be from the first operation until the predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses, and when the operation is performed a plurality of times within the predetermined period, the operation starts from the last operation. It may be until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses. Further, in this embodiment, the predetermined period is set after the operation, but the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) may elapse from the start of displaying the volume status display image VL.

Returning to step S601, if the super reach effect is being produced (step S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not the non-super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S612). If the non-super reach operation flag is off (step S612; No), it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S613). If the super reach operation flag is off (step S613; No), the process of erasing the volume status display is executed (step S614). As shown in FIG. 26A, which will be described later, steps S613 and S614 are, in principle, processes for not displaying the volume status during the super reach effect. Specifically, in the second state of executing the super reach effect (specific effect), that is, in the gaming state during the super reach effect, as shown in FIGS. 24 (C) to 24 (H) described later, unless requested by the player. The volume status display image VL is not displayed on the image display device 5 (the volume status display image VL is deleted). As a result, the volume status display image VL can be hidden during the execution of the super reach effect, which is an example of the game effect (the effect including important notices) that the player wants to show, and the effect of the super reach effect. Can be suppressed.

If the operation flag other than super reach is off in step S609 (step S609; No), or if a predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation in step S610 (step S610; No), the process of step S611 is executed. After that, when the non-super reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S612 (step S612; Yes), and when the super reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S613 (step S613). Yes), after executing the process of step S614, the volume status display process is terminated.

According to the volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 16, the volume status display image VL can be displayed even in the customer waiting state.

In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot middle music determination process (step S163) following the volume status display process (step S162).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the music determination process during the big hit. Here, the big hit middle song is a song that can be played during the big hit game state, and in this embodiment, a plurality of types of songs are prepared. The prepared multiple types of music will be described later.
In the jackpot music determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot is being hit (step S621). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot is in progress when the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received and the jackpot end designation command is not received. If the value of the effect process flag is any of 3 to 5, it may be determined that the jackpot is in progress. When the jackpot is in progress (step S621; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot is abrupt (step S622). For example, the effect control CPU 12 determines whether or not the jackpot corresponds abruptly based on the jackpot designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the jackpot is not hit (step S621; No) or if it is abrupt (step S622; Yes), the jackpot music determination process ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot is in progress (step S621; Yes) and is not abrupt (step S622; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the music determination flag is on (the music in the jackpot is determined). Whether or not it has been completed) is determined (step S623). Here, the music determined flag indicates whether or not the music during the jackpot has been determined, is set to the on state in step S633 described later, and is cleared to the off state in step S636. The data indicating the on or off state of the music determined flag is stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

When the music determined flag is off (the music during the big hit is not determined) (step S623; No), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the continuous chan count counter provided in the RAM 122 as described above, and makes the first hit (step S623; No). It is determined whether or not the number of consecutive chan counts is K = 1) (step S624).

In the case of the first hit (K = 1) in step S624 (step S624; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is accompanied by a musical piece reach (step S625). .. Here, the musical piece-based reach is a reach in which a musical piece corresponding to the type of the reach is played during the reach production. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18A as an example, super reach A to C are set as the musical reach. In the music-based reach, as shown in FIG. 18B, the music corresponding to the reach type is reproduced in a predetermined mode during the super reach production. The musical composition reproduction mode in the musical composition reach will also be described in the description of the production example which will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In the case of a music-based reach jackpot in step S625 (step S625; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the jackpot music according to the reach type (step S626). In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (A), if the reach type is Super Reach A, the big hit song is determined to be "Music A", and if it is Super Reach B, the big hit song is "Music". If it is Super Reach C, the jackpot song is decided as "B".

If it is not the first hit (K = 1) in step S624 (step S624; No), or if it is the first hit (step S624; Yes) but not the musical reach big hit (step S625; No), it is for effect control. The CPU 120 determines whether or not the first round in which the number of times the round game is executed in the jackpot game state is "1" is being executed (step S627). For example, whether or not it is the first round can be determined by confirming which number of rounds the command indicating the number of rounds is stored in the designated command storage area during the opening of the large winning opening.

When the first round is being executed (step S627; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific part of the selected song (step S628). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 issues a command to the voice control board 13 to output a specific part of the selected music (in this embodiment, a so-called “rust” part) to the voice control board 13. And transmit, and output the specific part of the music selected from the speakers 8L and 8R. That is, in the process of step S628, only the chorus portion of the selected jackpot song is reproduced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 18C, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of music that can be selected during the execution of the first round are prepared. Further, as shown in FIG. 18C, the number of songs that can be selected during the execution of the first round is set to increase as the number of consecutive chans increases. Specifically, this embodiment can be selected from three songs (music A to C) in 1 ≦ K ≦ 5 (K: the count value of the number of consecutive chans), and four in 6 ≦ K ≦ 10. It can be selected from songs (musics A to D), 5 songs (songs A to E) can be selected when 11 ≦ K ≦ 15, and 6 songs (songs A to F) can be selected when 16 ≦ K. Has been done.
For example, when K = 2, the number of songs that can be selected from the first hit (K = 1) increases by one, and when K = 3, the songs that can be selected from the first hit (K = 1) are increased. The number of selectable songs may be gradually increased by the number of consecutive chans, such as increasing by two songs. In addition, it is decided by lottery whether or not a new song can be selected and which type of song can be selected each time a big hit is made, not according to the specified number of consecutive chans. May be good. Further, in addition to the super reach A to C shown in FIG. 18 (A), for example, a super reach D that is executed only during the probability change is provided, and when a big hit accompanied by the super reach D is obtained, the super reach D is provided. The structure may be such that the corresponding music D can be selected.

Further, for the selection of the music, for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (B), the image showing the currently selectable music displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 19 (B) has 1 ≦ K ≦ 5). This is done by moving the cursor CU to the corresponding display example of songs A to C). The music selection operation is performed, for example, by the player tilting the stick controller 31A in the vertical direction. In this case, the image showing the music name moves according to the operation, and the music corresponding to the image of the music that is positioned (instructed) on the cursor CU becomes the currently selected music (FIG. 19 (FIG. 19). B) is an example in which "Music A" is selected). That is, in step S628, when the referent of the cursor CU moves to another song, the chorus portion of the moved destination song (the song currently instructed by the cursor CU) is reproduced.
As shown in FIG. 18C, when a song is added as the number of consecutive chans increases, it is preferable that the initial position of the cursor CU is the position indicating the added song. .. In this way, the newly added music can be preferably notified to the player. However, when the same song is selected in the jackpot of the immediately preceding predetermined times (for example, the immediately preceding two times), it is preferable that the initial position of the cursor CU is the position instructing the same song. In this way, it is possible to present a music that suits the player's taste, which is user-friendly.

The cursor CU may move with respect to the image showing the music name in response to the selection operation. Further, the method of showing the currently selected song is not limited to the instruction by the cursor CU, and the image showing the selected song can be made easier to see than the image showing another song (for example, showing the selected song). The frame image surrounding the image may be superimposed and displayed, the image showing the selected music may be illuminated, etc.), or the image showing the music other than the selected music may be difficult to see or invisible. Further, when selecting a musical piece, the volume level may be increased to output a specific part of the musical piece. For example, if the current volume level is the normal level (the above-mentioned third level), when selecting a song, a specific part may be output at the fourth level or the fifth level (maximum level), or the current volume may be output. If the level is the lowest level or the first level, a specific part may be output at the normal level when the music is selected.

Further, the "specific part" is a part of the selected song and different from the beginning of the song. In this embodiment, the so-called "rust" is an example of a specific part of the music. Here, in this embodiment, each music data of the music A to F as the above-mentioned big hit music is stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The music data indicating one musical piece is composed of a plurality of audio data (for example, WAV, MP3, etc.) including chorus data (an example of specific unit data) indicating chorus audio. Specifically, as illustrated for "music A" in FIG. 19 (A), the data showing the entire music A includes intro data, A melody data, B melody data, and chorus data. It is stored in the ROM 121 (as separate audio data) in a divided manner such as outro data. The same applies to each of the songs B to F as other jackpot songs. According to such a configuration, the burden on the data capacity can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the data for a specific part is stored in addition to the data for one song. By using a part of the data of one song (for example, data for B melody) alone during a predetermined production such as during the reach production or the advance notice production of the music-based reach, the music can be produced during the predetermined production. You may output only a part. In this way, as in this embodiment, the advantage of the configuration in which the data indicating one musical piece is stored as divided data can be further utilized.

Regarding the chorus data as an example of the specific part data, for each song, for example, a part that is familiar, has an impact, and is supposed to be catchy is selected in advance as "chorus", and the chorus part is selected. The voice data may be prepared in advance as rust data. Further, for example, the music A may be more famous for "sabi", but the music C may be more famous for "verse". In this case, for the music C, the specific part may be the verse (the specific part data is the data for the verse), and if the music C is selected in step S628, the verse part may be reproduced. In addition, a so-called head chorus song (a song whose beginning of the song starts with chorus) may be included in the jackpot song. Then, the specific part may be the beginning of the music (characteristic intro or head rust). That is, the data used as the specific unit may be different depending on the music. Further, when the music of the head chorus is included in the music of the big hit, the data used as the music data may be shared between the time of selecting the music and after the music is determined for the music of the head chorus. For example, when selecting a song, the chorus data and the data for the part following the chorus (for example, verse) are used to connect the chorus and the part following the chorus for playback, and the same data is used even after the song is determined. Then, the chorus and the part following the chorus may be connected and played.

Returning to FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there has been a music determination operation following the process of step S628 (step S629). For example, the music determination operation is a pressing operation performed on the push button 31B, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the music determination operation has been performed when the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B. If there is no music determination operation (step S629; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the large winning opening (step S630). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the first round large winning opening closing designation command from the main board 11, it may determine that it is the closing timing of the large winning opening. Then, when there is a music determination operation (step S629; Yes) or when the big winning opening closing timing is reached (step S630; No), the selected music is determined (step S631). That is, in this embodiment, during the execution of the first round, when the music determination operation is performed before the music determination operation is closed, or when the music determination operation is not performed and the music selection operation is closed. The selected song is determined to be the jackpot song.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the music is selected, the specific part of the selected music is reproduced, and when the music is selected, there are a plurality of methods for determining the music. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when the music is selected.

Following the processing of step S626 and step S631, the effect control CPU 120 stores the music information determined in step S626 or S631 in the RAM 122 (step S632), and sets the music determination flag to the ON state (step S633). .. The data indicating the on / off of the music determined flag is stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

Returning to step S623, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the music determination flag is on (step S623; Yes), the jackpot music determined in step S626 or S631 is played (step S634). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (step S635), and if it is the jackpot end timing (step S635; Yes), the reproduction of the music started in step S634 ends. And clear the music determined flag to the off state (step S636).

After the processing of steps S636 and S633 is executed, if the determination is No in steps S621, S627, S630, and S635, or if the determination is Yes in step S622, the jackpot music determination process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 18A, in the reach other than the music-based reach, the music during the big hit can be selected by the selection operation by the player during the execution of the first round (step S628 described above). There is. In this embodiment, "reach: normal (big hit)" (variation pattern PA3-1) shown in FIG. 10 is prepared as a reach other than the musical reach, but as a super reach other than the musical reach, "super" is prepared. Further reach types such as "Reach D" and "Super Reach E" are prepared, and when the jackpot is accompanied by the production of Super Reach D or Super Reach E, the selection operation by the player during the execution of the first round. Depending on the situation, the music during the big hit may be selectable. Further, in the above example, the example in which the jackpot song can be selected during the first round is shown, but the song may be selectable during another round, or the song is selected across a plurality of rounds. It may be possible. The period during which the music can be selected during the jackpot is arbitrary.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the music reproduction mode at the time of selecting the jackpot music and after determining the jackpot music will be described.

As shown in FIG. 19B, when a music is selected, a specific portion (“rust” as an example) of the selected music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (corresponding to step S628). The specific part is continuously played until the selected music is determined. The length of the specific portion corresponds to the period until the selected music is determined (corresponding to the period from the start of execution of the first round to the execution of the process of step S631. The period until the music determination operation is performed. Alternatively, if it is shorter than the execution period of the first round (for example, 29.5 seconds), the specific part is repeatedly played until the selected song is determined. If the length of the specific part is shorter than the period until the selected music is determined, the part following the specific part in the selected music following the reproduction of the specific part (FIG. 19 (A)). In the example of), the outro) indicated by the “outro data” may be reproduced.

Further, in this embodiment, when the music is selected, the image corresponding to the selected music (hereinafter referred to as the music corresponding image) is displayed in the display area VA1 shown in FIG. 19 (B). The music-compatible image is, for example, a moving image such as PV (Promotion Video) or MV (Music Video) of the selected music, and when selecting a music, for example, a part corresponding to a specific part of the moving image is reproduced in the display area VA1. To do. It should be noted that the moving image as the music-compatible image does not have to be played from the portion corresponding to the specific part of the music. For example, when selecting a song, the song may be played from a specific part other than the beginning, but the moving image may be played from the beginning. Further, the music-compatible image may be a still image showing an artist photograph or the like instead of a moving image. Further, the data of the music-compatible image may also be stored in the ROM 121 or the like in a manner divided for each part of the music (as separate image data), similarly to the audio data of the music.

As shown in FIG. 19C, after the music is determined, the audio data divided into a plurality of parts (for example, intro data, A melody data, B melody data, etc.) constituting the music data of the determined music. By connecting the chorus data and the outro data (that is, so that each part constituting one song is played back in chronological order), one song is played back from the speakers 8L and 8R. The determined reproduction mode of the jackpot music (corresponding to the reproduction mode of the music in step S634) is as follows (a) to (c), for example.
(B) After the music is determined during the execution of one round, the music is played from the continuation of the specific part that was being played at the time of selection, or is played from the beginning of the music.
(B) From the second round onward, the music is played from the beginning (for example, the music is played from the beginning in response to receiving the command for opening the large winning opening in the second round).
(C) In the case of K = 1 (step S624; Yes) and the music-based reach jackpot (step S625; Yes), the music corresponding to the reach type is played from the continuation of the part that was being played during the super reach production. Playback (For example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B), the songs "intro", "A melody", and "B melody" corresponding to the reach type are played during the super reach production, and when a big hit occurs, "chorus" is played. To play).
After the song is decided, it is played from the beginning (intro) of the song, and after the song has made a round to the end (outro) of the song with the jackpot not finished yet, it returns to the intro of the song and makes two rounds. The eyes may be regenerated, or the chorus (specific part) may be regenerated instead of the intro.

Further, after the music is determined, the music-corresponding image is displayed in, for example, the display area VA2 shown in FIG. 19C, which is larger than the display area VA1. The example shown in FIG. 19C is an example in which the display area VA2 is configured over the entire image display area of the image display device 5 after the music is determined. After the music is determined, for example, a moving image in which the reproduction portion and the corresponding portion of the music are sequentially reproduced may be displayed in the display area VA2. The music-compatible image displayed in the display area VA2 after the music is determined may also be a still image such as an artist photograph. Further, the music-corresponding images at the time of selecting the music and after the music is determined may have different display modes. That is, the display mode may be different by a method other than changing the position and size of the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 on which the music-corresponding image is displayed. For example, the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 have the same position and size, but the music-compatible image after the music is determined has an effect that is not present when the music is selected (for example, a fade-in / fade-out effect or a brilliant lighting effect). Etc.) may be applied.

The operation means for selecting and determining the music is not limited to the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B described above. The operating means may be, for example, a cross button that can be operated in the vertical and horizontal directions, a dial key that can be rotated, or a touch panel that can be touched or pressed. .. In addition, any operation that is not limited to the instruction input action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, and a CMOS sensor, may be performed as long as the operation content can be detected according to the operation by the player. A sensor that can detect may be used.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 15 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step S321). As the process of step S321, the effect control CPU 120 is based on variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. Then, the final stop symbol is determined. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". ". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". .. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the different (mismatched) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right confirmed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the same (matching) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left / right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 has "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 Determines decorative symbols with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine whether the decorative symbol (shown decorative symbol) or the probabilistic symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the final decorative symbol. In the big hit middle promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probable change big hit combination) that reminds the big hit but does not remind the probability change state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then the big hit game state or the big hit game state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probable change state is reached at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the fixed decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the jackpot from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

In the process of step S321, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", whether or not to execute a probabilistic promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a big hit medium promotion effect is performed. It may be decided. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. The player can recognizable that the decorative symbol is variably displayed (re-variated) and the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed to be controlled to the probabilistic state. In some cases, the decorative symbol of the non-probable change jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol is re-variated by the re-lottery effect, so that it is not notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. When it is determined in the process of step S321 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in the process of step S321, the change effect setting process (FIG. 21) for performing the execution setting such as the hold display change effect determined in the hold display setting process is executed (step S322). .. In the change effect setting process, when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed.

In the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 21, first, the stored contents in the hold display data storage unit are updated (step S551). That is, the hold display data storage unit erases the stored data in the storage area corresponding to the hold number "1", and corresponds to the storage areas lower than the hold number "1" (hold numbers "2" to "4"). The stored data in the storage area) is shifted upward one entry at a time. At this time, the hold display data storage unit may read the stored data to be erased from the storage area corresponding to the hold number "1" and store it in the hold display data buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold display change timing, which is the execution timing of the hold display change effect, is reached (step S552). In the process of step S552, one or a plurality of change effect timing patterns stored in the hold display data storage unit whose stored contents are updated by the process of step S551 match the hold numbers associated with the respective change effect timing patterns. Hold display Determines whether or not the change timing specification is included.

If it is determined in step S552 that the hold display change timing is reached (step S552; Yes), the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed (step S553). For example, in the process of step S553, the storage content of the hold display change pattern in the hold display data storage unit and the display mode in the current hold display are specified, and whether or not to change the display mode is set, and the change when the display mode is changed. The later display mode may be set, and the settings for executing the hold display change common effect may be made. In the process of step S553, among the active display change effects, the execution setting of the display color change effect that changes the display color of the active display based on the determination result of the hold display change pattern may be performed. As the execution setting of the display color change effect, for example, the hold display change pattern shown in the stored data of the hold display data buffer (the storage data deleted from the hold display data storage unit in the process of step S551) is specified. The display mode to be displayed after the active display change effect is executed is set.

Returning to FIG. 20, following the change effect setting process in step S322, the reach effect setting process described later, which sets the execution setting of the reach effect, is executed (step S323). In the reach effect setting process, the execution setting of the reach effect (for example, the reach effect in the super reach and the reach effect in the normal reach) is set.

Specifically, in the reach effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" that does not become the reach state, based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. If it is "non-reach", the reach effect setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is other than "non-reach", the reach effect setting process is terminated after the reach effect is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

After that, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S324). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and uses it as a usage pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) in response to the hold display change effect by the change effect setting process in step S322, and uses it as a pattern to be used. You may set it. In the display change effect control pattern, a hold display change effect period, which is a determination target in the variable display setting process (FIG. 22) described later, is also set. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, the display change effect control pattern, and the reach effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, and one effect control corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is used. It may be the one that sets the pattern.

Following the process of step S324, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. (Step S325). Then, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S326). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of step S324 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. For example, the variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5.

After the process of step S326 is executed, in response to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL, etc. Make settings for updating the hold display and the like (step S327). For example, when a special figure game using the first special figure is executed (started), the display part (the display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is deleted in the first hold display unit 5HR. At the same time as (digesting), the first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. On the other hand, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed (started), the display part (display part at the right end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is deleted in the second hold display unit 5HL. At the same time as (digesting), the second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the right. Further, in the process of step S327, a setting for updating the active display in the active display unit AHA may be made. In this case, for example, when the first hold display corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested) by the first hold display unit 5HR, the same active display as the erased (digested) first hold display is displayed. Start with the active display unit AHA. On the other hand, when the second hold display corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested) in the second hold display unit 5HL, the same active display as the erased (digested) second hold display is actively displayed. Start in part AHA.

After updating the hold display or the like by the process of step S327, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S328), and then the variable display start setting process is performed. finish.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of FIG. 15 as the variable display effect process. In the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 22, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S341). As an example, in the process of step S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S341 (step S341; No), it is determined whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (step S342). The hold display change effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S324 shown in FIG. In the case of the hold display change effect period (step S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (step S343). In the process of step S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, blinking or extinguished. It suffices that the hold display change effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device by the above, or by combining a part or all of them.

When it is determined in step S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (step S342; No), or after the process of step S343 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S346. When it is not the hold display change effect period (step S342; No), or after the execution of step S343, for example, in the same manner as the above-mentioned processes of steps S342 and S343, it is determined whether the active display change effect period is in effect. Alternatively, control for executing the active display change effect may be executed.

In step S346, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. The reach effect period may be predetermined in, for example, an effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined in step S346 that it is the reach effect period (step S346; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is super reach (step S346A). When it is determined to be super reach (step S346A; Yes), a hold display erasing process for erasing the hold display displayed on the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL is executed (step S347). .. For example, as shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the hold display of the second hold display unit 5HL is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 until the start of the super reach effect. By executing this hold display erasing process, as shown in FIG. 24C, when the super reach effect is started (that is, when the start timing of the super reach effect is reached), the hold display of the second hold display unit 5HL is erased. (If the hold display of the first hold display unit 5HR is displayed, the hold display is also deleted), the hold display is hidden. Since the hold display is hidden during the super reach effect in this way, the predetermined area portion at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 (that is, the display area portion of the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL) Can also display images by super reach production. In addition, the player can pay attention to the super reach effect without worrying about the hold display, and can enjoy such an effect. Therefore, the reach effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

When the super reach effect is completed, the non-display of the hold display is ended by the hold display return control (step S349B) described later. That is, the hold display is restored. In this embodiment, the hold display is hidden during the super reach effect, but it may be hidden during the normal reach effect.

After executing the process of step S347, a temporary display process of temporarily displaying the volume status display image VL is executed even during the super reach effect when there is a request from the player (step S347). That is, when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL (see FIG. 25 (D)) is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). )Is displayed.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S348 of FIG. 22 as the temporary display process. In the temporary display process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the operation flag other than super reach is set to the ON state (step S701). When the non-super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S701; Yes), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S702). If a predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S702; No), it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S703).

When there is a volume change operation (step S703; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S704). In step S704, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (for example, to the left or right), the image display device 5 is provided with the changed volume status display image VL. In addition to executing the display control to be displayed, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume setting is executed such that the voice control board 13 is controlled so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (Step S704).

On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S702; Yes), the volume status display erasing process for erasing the volume status display image VL displayed on the image display device 5 is executed (step S705). When not super reach, the operation flag is reset to the off state (step S706).

When the operation flag is off except for super reach in step S701 (step S701; No), when there is no volume change operation in step S703 (step S703; No), after executing the process of step S704, or After executing the process of step S706, it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S707).

If the super reach operation flag is off in step S707 (step S707; No), it is determined whether or not the volume change operation start reception is accepted (step S708). When the operation start is accepted in step S708 (step S708; Yes), that is, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A, the image display device 5 has the current volume status. The display control for displaying the display image VL is executed (step S709). As shown in FIG. 25 (D), the current volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the operation of the stick controller 31A during the super reach effect. After executing the process of step S709, the super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S710).

When the super reach operation flag is turned on in step S707 (step S707; Yes), or after executing the process of step S710, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (for example, 3 seconds). Step S711). If a predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S711; No), it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S712). When there is a volume change operation (step S712; Yes), the display of the changed volume status display image VL and the changed volume setting are executed (step S713). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction (step S712; Yes), the change according to the number of operations of the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction. The display control for displaying the later volume status display image VL on the image display device 5 is executed, and the changed volume setting value according to the number of operations is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The changed volume setting such as controlling the voice control board 13 so as to be performed is executed (step S607).

For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (E), when the player operates the stick controller 31A once to the right, the lighting mode of the image display section is increased by one, and the changed volume status display image VL (fourth level). The volume status display image VL) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one level. Contrary to the above, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once to the left, the changed volume status display image VL in which the lighting mode of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 5. At the same time, the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered by one level.

When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S711; Yes), a process of erasing the volume status display is executed (step S714). For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (F), when a predetermined period elapses after the operation, the display of the volume status display image VL is erased. That is, the volume status display is hidden. In this way, during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is temporarily displayed when there is an operation by the player, and when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation, the volume status display is displayed if the super reach effect is still in progress. The image VL is erased.

After executing the process of step S714, the operation flag at the time of super reach is reset to the off state (step S715). Then, when there is no operation start reception in step S708 (step S708; No), when there is no volume change operation in step S712 (step S712; No), after executing the process of step S713, or in step S715. After executing the process of, the temporary display process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 22, when it is determined in step S346A that the reach is not super reach (step S346A; No), or after the process of step S348 is executed, control for executing other reach effects is performed (step S346A; No). Step S349).

Whether or not it is the hold display return timing (for example, the end timing of the super reach effect) when it is determined in step S346 that it is not the reach effect period (step S346; No) or after the process of step S349 is executed. Is determined (step S349A). When it is determined in step S349A that it is the hold display return timing (step S349A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display return control for returning the hold display (step S349B). For example, when the hold display return timing (for example, the end timing of the super reach effect) is reached, the hold display is returned as shown in FIG. 25 (I).

When it is determined in step S349A that it is not the hold display return timing (step S349A; No), or after the processing of step S349B is executed, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern may be performed. Based on this, control for executing other effects during the variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol, is performed (step S350), and the effect process during the variable display ends.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step S341 (step S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S351). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S351; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and the device waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S351 (step S351; Yes), for example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result (step S352). At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S353). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S354), the variable display effect process is terminated.

Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

In the pachinko game machine 1, for example, after a game ball driven into the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening and a starting winning such as a first starting winning or a second starting winning is generated. , The variable display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the start condition that allows the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. To. On the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

When the first start condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of the first start prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening, the processes of steps S203 and S207 shown in FIG. 4 are executed. , The number of 1st special figure reserved storage is added by 1. When the second start condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of the second start prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start prize opening, the processes of steps S206 and S207 shown in FIG. 4 are executed. , The number of 2nd special figure reserved storage is added by 1. At this time, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted by the process of step S209. Then, by executing the winning random number value determination process as shown in FIG. 5 in step S212, the variable display content such as whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is determined, and the winning determination result. The winning determination result command indicating the above is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the establishment of the start condition, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are executed by executing the fluctuation pattern setting process as shown in FIG. 9 in step S111 shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern designation command that determines any of the above and indicates that the determined fluctuation pattern can be specified is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

In step S321 shown in FIG. 20, the final stop symbol or the like is determined based on the fluctuation pattern or the like indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, and then, as the change effect setting processing in step S322, the processing as shown in FIG. 21 is executed. Will be done. In the change effect setting process, when it is determined in step S552 that it is the hold display change timing, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed in step S553.

(Production example)
Here, an example of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25.
FIG. 24 shows an example of the effect when there is no volume change operation in the super reach fluctuation display. When the variable display (variable display) of the decorative symbol is started, the reach effect setting process of step S323 shown in FIG. 20 is executed. In the reach effect setting process, for example, it is determined that the reach effect in the super reach (any of the super reach A to C as the music-based reach) is executed. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 24A, the variable display state of the decorative symbol will be described from the time when the reach state (reach is established). Further, by the volume status display process shown in FIG. 16, the volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 24 (A).

Through FIG. 24 (B), the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. 24 (C) is executed. The super reach is notified by displaying an effect image (for example, an image in the characters of "super reach") as shown in FIG. 24C on the screen of the image display device 5. The player can grasp that the super reach effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 24C, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The reduced display of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be executed, for example, in the process of step S350. Further, by the volume status display erasing process (step S614) shown in FIG. 16, the volume status display image VL is erased from the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 24 (C). Further, by the hold display erasing process (step S347) shown in FIG. 22, the hold display is erased as shown in FIG. 24 (C).

Subsequently, a super reach effect including a battle effect as shown in FIGS. 24 (D) to 24 (H) is executed. As shown in FIG. 24 (H), the battle effect result (for example, the battle defeat result in this case) is displayed to end the super reach effect, and for example, the final stop symbol of the reach combination as shown in FIG. 24 (I) is displayed. Derived and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed by the volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 16, and is held by the hold display control process (step S349B) shown in FIG. The display is restored. As shown in FIG. 24 (I), the variable display ends when the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative symbol when the fluctuation is stopped, so that the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, that is, the visual recognition of the game result can be visually recognized. You can adjust the volume without disturbing it.

Here, the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is not performed in the super reach fluctuation display shown in FIG. 24 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (A). FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is not performed in the super reach fluctuation display.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A remains at a low level because the player did not operate the stick controller 31A at all in the super reach fluctuation display. The volume status display is displayed on the image display device 5 except during the super reach effect.

Further, during the production of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 18A, the music corresponding to the reach type is played. For example, when the super reach notification is executed as shown in FIG. 24 (C), for example, as shown in FIG. Will be played back in sequence. Then, for example, an effect using a special sound effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, several seconds) between the effect shown in FIG. 24 (E) and the effect shown in FIG. 24 (F).

As the effect of the special sound effect, for example, a so-called SE (Sound Effect) effect such as an echo effect sound, a repeat sound, a noise sound, or a fade-in / fade-out sound may be executed. Further, the sound may be silenced for the predetermined period. Further, it is preferable that the moving image played during the production by the super reach is also subjected to the effect only for the predetermined period in addition to the output of the special sound effect. For example, if the video suddenly stops (becomes a still image), the screen is blacked out, or a noise display (for example, a sandstorm display on an analog TV) is used. Good.

Then, for example, in response to a predetermined operation performed from the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the execution of the effect by the special sound effect, or in response to the elapse of a predetermined period, FIG. 24 The battle effect result shown in (H) is displayed, and along with this display, a loss sound effect for notifying the loss is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 18B, rust is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a continuation of the part of the music played during the production of the super reach. In this way, by applying special effects to the audio and video before the battle effect result (the result of the effect of notifying the success or failure of winning or losing) is displayed, it is possible to arouse the expectation of the player.

The control for executing the reach effect accompanied by such a special effect can be executed in step S349 described above. Further, the period for executing the special effect may be predetermined for each variation pattern of the music-based reach, for example. Further, the music does not have to be played from the beginning (intro) during the production of the music-based reach, and the music may be started from the verse A, the verse B, or the like. Further, if a big hit occurs after the production of the music-based reach, it may be reproduced from the continuation of the portion reproduced during the production of the music-based reach during the execution of the first round. For example, (i) the verse may be played during the reach production, and the verse may be played from the B melody following the A melody during the first round execution, or (ii) the verse may be played halfway during the reach production. Then, during the execution of the first round, the music may be played from the continuation of the verse.

Next, a case where there is a volume change operation in the super reach fluctuation display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows an example of an effect when there is a volume change operation in the super reach fluctuation display. Since FIGS. 25 (A) to 25 (C) are the same as those in FIGS. 24 (A) to 24 (C) described above, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the music reproduction mode during the super reach production is the same as described above.

As shown in FIG. 25 (D), when the stick controller 31A is operated during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is displayed. Then, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once to the right, as shown in FIG. 25 (E), the changed volume status display image VL in which the lighting mode of the image display section is increased by one. (4th level volume status display image VL) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by 1 level (the volume output is 4th level). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation, the volume status display image VL is erased as shown in FIG. 25 (F).

The super reach effect is completed by displaying the battle effect result (here, for example, the battle defeat result) as shown in FIG. 25 (H) through FIG. 25 (D), and as shown in FIG. 25 (I), for example. The final stop symbol of each reach combination is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (I), since the super reach effect is completed, the changed volume status display image VL is displayed and the hold display is restored.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 (D) and 25 (E), the volume status display image VL in the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect is other than that during the super reach effect as shown in FIG. 25 (I). Since it is displayed in the same manner as the display mode of the volume status display image VL in the gaming state (first state), the display of the volume status display image VL in the second state can be easily understood. As described above, the first state and the second state do not have to be the same. For example, the volume status display image VL in the second state may display a display different from the volume status display image VL in the first state at the same display location as in the first state, or [2]. The same display as the volume status display image VL in the first state may be displayed at a different display location from that in the first state, and [3] a display different from the volume status display image VL in the first state may be displayed in the first state. It may be displayed in a display location different from that in the state.

Here, the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is performed in the super reach fluctuation display shown in FIG. 25 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (B). FIG. 26B is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when there is a volume change operation in the super reach fluctuation display.

As shown in FIG. 26B, the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach effect, and such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A. That is, the controller sensor unit 35A detects a detection signal (pulse signal) according to the operation by the player and outputs the detection signal (pulse signal) to the effect control board 12. As for the volume status display, the volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation by the player during the super reach effect.

Next, the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the start of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (A). FIG. 27A is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the start of the super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 27 (A), the player may operate the stick controller 31A immediately before the start of the super reach effect (for example, within the period from 3 seconds before the start to the start). Also in this case, such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the display of the volume status display image VL is started. Then, the super reach effect starts within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of displaying the volume status display image VL. The volume status display image VL is deleted in the middle at the start timing of the effect. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the start of the super reach effect is extended and displayed by steps S701 to S706 in the temporary display process shown in FIG. 23 described above. (See the extended display shown in FIG. 27 (A)). As a result, even if the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the start of the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is extended and displayed, and the volume status display image VL is interrupted at the start timing of the super reach effect. It can be prevented from being erased with. In the example shown in FIG. 27 (A), the volume status display image VL is secured so as to be displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds) after the operation. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27B, the volume status display image VL may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start timing of the super reach effect.

Next, the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (C). FIG. 27C is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 27 (C), the player may operate the stick controller 31A immediately before the end of the super reach effect (for example, within the period from 3 seconds before the end to the end). Also in this case, such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the display of the volume status display image VL is started. Then, the super reach effect ends within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of displaying the volume status display image VL. When the predetermined period elapses, the volume status display image VL is once erased and then displayed again. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the end of the super reach effect is produced by the super reach effect by step S601, step S602, step S604, and step S605 in the volume status display process shown in FIG. Is displayed continuously even after the end of (see "Continuing display" shown in FIG. 27 (C)). As a result, even if the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the end of the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL is continued, and the volume status display image VL is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation. It is possible to eliminate unnecessary processing of erasing once and displaying it again.

(About the production process when the attacker is open)
From here, the effect processing (step S174) at the time of opening the attacker shown in FIG. 15 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing when the attacker is open. In the effect processing when the attacker is open, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot end designation command has been received (step S181). At this time, if the jackpot end designation command is not received (step S181; NO), the first round to the fourth round in which the number of executions of the round game in the jackpot game state is "1" to "4" is being executed. (Step S182).

If it is determined in step S182 that the first to fourth rounds are being executed (step S182; YES), the effect operation that is the promotion effect during the big hit is controlled (step S183). As described above, in this embodiment, during the execution of the first round to the fourth round in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot promotion effect as the sixth notification, which is the notification effect of whether or not to control the probabilistic state, is performed. Will be executed.

The jackpot medium promotion production includes a jackpot medium promotion success production that notifies that there is a promotion in which the game state becomes a probable change state even though the fixed decoration symbol is a non-probable change big hit combination, and there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state. There is a big hit middle promotion failure production that informs. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and either the non-probable variable symbol or the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. By displaying different production images or the like, it is sufficient to notify the player of the presence or absence of promotion in a probable change state so that the player can recognize it.

When it is determined in step S182 that the first to fourth rounds are not being executed (step S182; NO), or after the processing of step S183 is executed, it is notified that the predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied. The effect operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed (step S184). The effect control CPU 120 is based on variable display contents such as a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and a variable display result indicated by a variable display result notification command. It suffices to determine whether or not the probability variation control condition is satisfied. Further, for example, a configuration may be configured in which the probability variation control condition for entering the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied in response to the passage of the game ball through the specific area of the game board. In this case, a specific area switch may be provided in the specific area, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the probability variation control condition is satisfied when the specific area switch detects the passage of the game ball.

(Probability change confirmation notification effect operation control processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S184 of FIG. 28 as the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process. In this probability variation confirmation notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the probability variation confirmation notification effect period based on, for example, an effect control pattern (step S801).

If it is not the probability change confirmation notification effect period in step S801 (step S801; NO), it is determined whether or not the probability change confirmation notification command has been received (step S802). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification command is not received (step S802; NO), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process is terminated.

When the probability change confirmation notification command is received in step S802 (step S802; YES), or when the probability change confirmation notification effect period is in step S801 (step S801; YES), error notification is being executed. Whether or not it is determined (step S803). At this time, if the error notification is not being executed (step S803; NO), after the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed in the uppermost layer (step S804), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation is performed. End the control process. For example, in the process of step S804, in order to execute the probability change confirmation notification effect according to the predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data read from the effect control pattern or the like prepared in advance for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect. , Various commands may be created and transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, the probability variation confirmation notification effect is executed, for example, the probability variation confirmation notification effect image as shown in FIG. 34 (B) is displayed on the uppermost layer.

It should be noted that steps S805 (FIG. 29), steps S818 to S820 (FIG. 30), steps S900 to S902 (FIG. 31), steps S465 to S468 (FIG. 32), and steps S475 to S479 (FIG. 33) related to the effect operation control described later. ) Also creates various commands in order to execute the effect according to the predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data read from the effect control pattern or the like prepared in advance, as in step S804. The data may be transmitted to the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like.

The probability change confirmation notification effect image shown in FIG. 34B includes a character image MM2 that notifies the message “probability change!” In response to the establishment of a predetermined probability change control condition. The display time of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image (execution period of the probability variation confirmation notification effect) may be, for example, 20 seconds.

When the error notification is being executed in step S803 (step S803; YES), after performing the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect in the layer lower than the layer in which the error notification is executed. (Step S805), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to "0", and the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to "1" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 controls to preferentially execute error notification over the probability variation confirmation notification effect, such as displaying the probability variation confirmation notification effect image on a layer lower than the layer on which the error notification image is displayed. Do.

In step S184 of FIG. 28, after executing such a probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit is executed. The effect operation control is performed (step S185).

(Prize ball number notification effect operation control process)
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S185 of FIG. 28 as the prize ball number notification effect operation control process. In this prize ball number notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the prize ball number notification effect period is in effect, for example, based on the effect control pattern (step S811).

If it is not the prize ball number notification production period in step S811 (step S811; NO), the prize ball number notification that the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit has reached "2000" is notified. It is determined whether or not the effect has been executed (step S812). In the process of step S812, for example, a 2000 arrival flag that is set to the ON state when notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls has reached "2000" during the big hit is provided, and the flag is set. The determination may be made based on whether or not the 2000 arrival flag is in the ON state.

Similarly to step S812, in each process of step S814 (FIG. 30), step S393, and S395 (FIG. 31) described later, for example, the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls reaches "predetermined number". A arrival flag that is set to the ON state when the notification of the event is provided may be provided, and the determination may be made based on whether or not this arrival flag is in the ON state.

If the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit in step S812 has reached "2000" has not been executed (step S812; NO), RAM 122 The prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area of is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read value is "2000" or more (step S813). At this time, if the prize ball count value is not "2000" or more (step S813; NO), the prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

If the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls has reached "2000" during the big hit in step S812 has been executed (step S812; YES), the big hit It is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls has reached "2400" has been executed (step S814).

If the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit in step S814 has reached "2400" has been executed (step S814; YES), the prize is awarded. The ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

If the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit in step S814 has reached "2400" has not been executed (step S814; NO), the RAM 122 The prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area of is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read value is "2400" or more (step S815). At this time, if the prize ball count value is not "2400" or more (step S815; NO), the prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

When the prize ball count value is "2000" or more in step S813 (step S813; YES), or when the prize ball count value is "2400" or more in step S815 (step S815; YES). If the prize ball number notification effect period is set in step S811 (step S811; YES), it is determined whether or not the probability variation confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S816).

If the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed in step S816 (step S816; NO), it is determined whether or not the error notification is being executed (step S817). At this time, if the error notification is not being executed (step S817; NO), after the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed in the uppermost layer (step S818), the prize ball number notification is performed. The effect operation control process is terminated. As a result, the prize ball number notification effect is executed, for example, the prize ball number notification effect image as shown in FIG. 34 (C) is displayed on the uppermost layer.

The prize ball number notification effect image shown in FIG. 34 (C) notifies the message "2000 GET" in response to the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls reaching "2000" during the big hit. It includes a character image MM3 and a character image CA1 in which the message "2000 GET" is emitted as a dialogue. The display time of the prize ball number notification effect image (execution period of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect) may be, for example, 10 seconds.

When the error notification is being executed in step S817 (step S817; YES), the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect in the layer lower than the layer in which the error notification is executed is performed. After that (step S819), the prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to "0", and the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image is set to "2" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 preferentially executes error notification over the prize ball number notification effect, such as displaying the prize ball number notification effect image on a layer lower than the layer on which the error notification image is displayed. Take control.

When the probability variation confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S816 (step S816; YES), the operation for executing the prize ball number notification effect in a layer lower than the layer on which the probability change confirmation notification effect is executed. After performing the control (step S820), the prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to "1", and the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image is set to "2" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 gives priority to the probability variation confirmation notification effect over the prize ball number notification effect, such as displaying the prize ball number notification effect image on a layer lower than the layer on which the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Control to execute.

In FIG. 30, when the process of step S820 is performed, the prize ball number notification effect operation control process is completed, but the process of step S817 may be executed following the process of step S820. That is, in one execution of the prize ball number notification effect operation control process (step S185), the operation control in a plurality of layers may be collectively performed. The same applies to other similar operation control processes (for example, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process (step S186) in FIG. 31).

After executing such a prize ball number notification effect operation control process in step S185 of FIG. 28, the cumulative number of prize balls that notify the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit during the consecutive chan. The effect operation control for executing the notification effect is performed (step S186).

(Cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S186 of FIG. 28 as the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process. In this cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot promotion effect has been completed (step S391). In the process of step S391, for example, a big hit middle promotion effect flag that is turned on during execution of the big hit middle promotion effect may be provided, and the determination may be made based on whether or not the big hit middle promotion effect flag is on. ..

If the jackpot promotion effect is not completed in step S391 (step S391; NO), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. As described above, in this embodiment, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed until the jackpot promotion effect is completed. This is an important effect that the player should pay attention to, whether or not the jackpot middle promotion effect executed in the first to fourth rounds in this embodiment has a promotion in which the game state becomes a probable change state. However, by the time the promotion effect during the big hit is completed, whether the consecutive chan will continue by executing the cumulative prize ball number notification effect that improves the effect on the premise that the consecutive chan will continue. This is so as not to reduce the degree of attention to the promotion effect during the big hit, which also informs whether or not it is.

When the jackpot promotion effect is completed in step S391 (step S391; YES), it is determined whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect period is reached, for example, based on the effect control pattern (step S392). ).

If it is not the cumulative prize ball notification production period in step S392 (step S392; NO), it means that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit during the consecutive chan has reached "5000". It is determined whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect to be notified has been executed (step S393).

If the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit in the consecutive chan in step S393 has reached "5000" has not been executed (step). S393; NO), the cumulative prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is "5000" or more (step S394). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number count value is not "5000" or more (step S394; NO), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

When the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls has reached "5000" during the big hit in the consecutive chan in step S393 has been executed (step). S393; YES), it is determined whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit during the consecutive chan has reached "10000" has been executed. (Step S395).

When the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit in the consecutive chan has reached "10000" in step S395 has been executed (step). S395; YES), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

If the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit in the consecutive chan in step S395 has reached "10000" has not been executed (step). S395; NO), the cumulative prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is "10000" or more (step S396). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number count value is not "10000" or more (step S396; NO), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

When the cumulative prize ball count value is "5000" or more in step S394 (step S394; YES), or when the cumulative prize ball count value is "10000" or more in step S396 (step S396; YES). ), If the cumulative prize ball number notification effect period is in step S392 (step S392; YES), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S397).

If the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S397 (step S397; YES), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. As described above, in this embodiment, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed. This is because the prize ball number notification effect and the cumulative prize ball number notification effect are similar to each other, and if they are executed at the same time, the degree of attention to any of the effects may be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, the prize ball number notification effect is preferentially executed over the cumulative prize ball number notification effect. By preferentially executing the cumulative prize ball number notification effect over the prize ball number notification effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the degree of attention to any of the effects.

If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S397 (step S397; NO), it is determined whether or not the probability variation confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S398). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S398; NO), it is determined whether or not the error notification is being executed (step S399).

If the error notification is not being executed in step S399 (step S399; NO), the operation control for executing the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is performed in the uppermost layer (step S900), and then the cumulative prize is accumulated. The ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. As a result, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed, for example, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image as shown in FIG. 34 (D) is displayed on the uppermost layer.

The cumulative prize ball number notification effect image shown in FIG. 34 (D) corresponds to "5000 OVER" corresponding to the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit during the consecutive chan. It includes a character image MM4 that notifies the message "!" And a character image CA2 that emits the message "5000OVER!" As a dialogue. The display time of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image (execution period of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect) may be, for example, 10 seconds.

If the error notification is being executed in step S399 (step S399; YES), operation control is performed to execute the cumulative prize ball number notification effect in a layer lower than the layer on which the error notification is executed. After that (step S901), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to "0", and the Z value of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image is set to "2" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 gives priority to error notification over the cumulative prize ball number notification effect, such as displaying the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image on a layer lower than the layer on which the error notification image is displayed. Control to execute.

When the probability variation confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S398 (step S398; YES), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed in a layer lower than the layer on which the probability change confirmation notification effect is executed. After performing the motion control (step S902), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect motion control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to "1", and the Z value of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image is set to "2" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 displays the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image on a layer lower than the layer on which the probability change confirmation effect image is displayed, which is more probable change confirmation notification effect than the cumulative prize ball number notification effect. Is controlled to be executed preferentially.

In step S186 of FIG. 28, after executing such a cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process, operation control for executing continuous chan number notification for notifying the number of consecutive chans is performed (step S187).

(Continuous chan count notification operation control processing)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S187 of FIG. 28 as the continuous channel number notification operation control process. In this continuous chan number notification operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S461). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not being executed (step S461; NO), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S462).

If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S462 (step S462; NO), it is determined whether or not the probability variation confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S463). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S463; NO), it is determined whether or not the error notification is being executed (step S464).

If the error notification is not being executed in step S464 (step S464; NO), the operation control for executing the continuous chan number notification is performed in the uppermost layer (step S465), and then the continuous chan number notification is performed. End the operation control process. As a result, the continuous chan number notification is executed, for example, the continuous chan number notification image as shown in FIG. 34 (E) is displayed on the uppermost layer.

The continuous chan count notification shown in FIG. 34 (E) includes a character image MM5 that notifies the message "big hit x N (N is the continuous chan count)" corresponding to the continuous chan count. The notification (display) time of the number of consecutive chans may be, for example, 5 seconds.

When the error notification is being executed in step S464 (step S464; YES), after performing the operation control for executing the continuous change number notification in the layer lower than the layer in which the error notification is executed. (Step S466), the continuous-chan count notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to "0", and the Z value of the continuous change number notification image is set to "3" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 controls to preferentially execute error notification over continuous-chan number notification, such as displaying the continuous-chan number notification image on a layer lower than the layer on which the error notification image is displayed. Do.

When the probability variation confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S463 (step S463; YES), the operation control for executing the continuous change number notification in a layer lower than the layer on which the probability change confirmation notification effect is executed. (Step S467), the operation control process for notifying the number of consecutive chans is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to "1", and the Z value of the continuous change number notification image is set to "3" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 gives priority to the probability change confirmation notification effect over the consecutive chan number notification, such as displaying the consecutive chan number notification image on a layer lower than the layer on which the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Control to execute.

When the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S462 (step S462; YES), the layer below the layer on which the prize ball number notification effect is executed is used to perform the continuous chan number notification. After performing the operation control (step S468), the operation control process for notifying the number of consecutive chans is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image is set to "2", and the Z value of the continuous chan number notification image is set to "3" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 gives priority to the prize ball number notification effect over the consecutive chan number notification, such as displaying the consecutive chan number notification image on a layer lower than the layer on which the prize ball number notification effect image is displayed. Control to execute.

If the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S461 (step S461; YES), the continuous chan number notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer on which the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed. (Step S469), the operation control process for notifying the number of consecutive chans is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image is set to "2", and the Z value of the continuous chan number notification image is set to "3" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 displays the cumulative prize ball number notification image on a layer lower than the layer on which the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image is displayed. Is controlled to be executed preferentially.

In step S187 of FIG. 28, after executing such a continuous-chan count notification operation control process, a jackpot music name notification operation control process for notifying the music name being played during the jackpot is executed (step S188). ).

(Music name notification operation control processing during big hit)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S188 of FIG. 28 as the music name notification operation control process during the big hit. In this jackpot music name notification operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S471). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not being executed (step S471; NO), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S472).

If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S472 (step S472; NO), it is determined whether or not the probability variation confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S473). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S473; NO), it is determined whether or not the error notification is being executed (step S474).

If the error notification is not being executed in step S474 (step S474; NO), the operation control for executing the big hit music name notification is performed in the uppermost layer (step S475), and then the big hit music. The name notification operation control process is terminated. As a result, the jackpot music name notification is executed, for example, the jackpot music name notification image as shown in FIG. 34 (F) is displayed on the uppermost layer.

The jackpot music name notification shown in FIG. 34 (F) includes a character image MM6 that notifies the message "MUSIC: xxxxxxxxx (xxxxxxxxx is the music name)" corresponding to the music name being played during the jackpot. I'm out. The notification (display) time of the music name (execution time of the music name notification during the big hit) may be, for example, 30 seconds.

When the error notification is being executed in step S474 (step S474; YES), the operation control for executing the big hit music name notification is performed in the layer lower than the layer in which the error notification is executed. After that (step S476), the music name notification operation control process during the big hit is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to "0", and the Z value of the music name notification image during the jackpot is set to "3" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 preferentially executes error notification over jackpot music name notification, such as displaying the jackpot music name notification image on a layer lower than the layer on which the error notification image is displayed. Take control.

When the probability variation confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S473 (step S473; YES), an operation for executing the jackpot hitting music name notification in a layer lower than the layer on which the probability change confirmation notification effect is executed. After the control is performed (step S477), the music name notification operation control process during the big hit is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to "1", and the Z value of the music name notification image during the jackpot is set to "3" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 gives priority to the probability change confirmation notification effect over the jackpot music name notification, such as displaying the jackpot music name notification image on a layer lower than the layer on which the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Control to execute.

If the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S472 (step S472; YES), the jackpot music name notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer on which the prize ball number notification effect is executed. After performing the operation control of (step S478), the music name notification operation control process during the big hit is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image is set to "2", and the Z value of the music name notification image during the jackpot is set to "3" and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 displays the prize ball number notification image on a layer lower than the layer on which the prize ball number notification effect image is displayed, which is a prize ball number notification effect rather than the jackpot music name notification. Is controlled to be executed preferentially.

If the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S471 (step S471; YES), the jackpot music name notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer on which the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed. After performing the operation control for performing (step S479), the music name notification operation control process during the big hit is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image is set to "2", and the Z value of the big hit music name notification image is set to "3" and registered. .. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 displays the cumulative prize ball number notification image on the layer lower than the layer on which the jackpot music name notification image is displayed, which is the cumulative number of prize balls compared to the jackpot music name notification. Controls to preferentially execute the notification effect.

When the jackpot end designation command is received in step S181 shown in FIG. 28 (step S181; YES), the jackpot end notification effect time is set (step S189). In the process of step S189, for example, one of a plurality of types of jackpot end notification effect time is selected and set in response to the jackpot end effect waiting time specified by the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11. do it. More specifically, the same time as the jackpot end notification effect waiting time specified by the jackpot end designation command may be set as the jackpot end notification effect time.

Following the process of step S189, the jackpot end notification effect control pattern is set (step S190). In the process of step S190, for example, it corresponds to the control content of whether or not the probability change state is specified by the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the jackpot end notification effect time set in the process of step S189, and the like. Then, from among a plurality of types of jackpot end notification effect control patterns prepared in advance, a pattern to be used may be selected and set.

After executing the process of step S190, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" (step S191), and then the effect process when the attacker is released ends. By updating the value of the effect process flag to "5", the ending effect process (step S175) shown in FIG. 15 is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

FIG. 36 shows an operation of displaying a notification image in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the prize ball number notification effect, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect, the consecutive chan number notification, and the jackpot music name notification overlap. An example is shown. For example, when the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit reaches "2000", whether or not it is the execution period of the continuous chan number notification, the big hit middle song name notification, and the cumulative prize ball number notification effect. Regardless of the above, in the process of step S818 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 30, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect in the uppermost layer. Is done.

On the other hand, when the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit during the consecutive chan reaches "5000", the processing after step S397 in the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 31 is executed. Will be done. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, the reason why the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S397 shown in FIG. 31 is shown in FIG. As shown in 36 (A), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed.

Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous change number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. 36 (A) As shown in the above, the operation control for executing the continuous chan number notification is performed in the layer lower than the layer on which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S478 in the big hit middle music name notification operation control process of FIG. 33, FIG. 36 (A) ), The operation control for executing the big hit middle song name notification is performed in the layer lower than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

In this way, when the execution periods of the prize ball number notification effect, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect, the consecutive chan number notification, and the big hit middle song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the highest rank While the prize ball number notification effect is executed in the layer, the consecutive chan number notification and the jackpot hit song name notification are executed in the lower layers, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed.

FIG. 37 shows an operation example of displaying a notification image in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect, the consecutive chan number notification, and the jackpot music name notification overlap. Shown. For example, when a predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied, the probability variation confirmation notification effect operation control process of FIG. 29 is performed regardless of whether or not it is the execution period of the prize ball number notification effect, the consecutive chan number notification, and the big hit middle song name notification. In the process of step S804 in the above, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed in the uppermost layer.

On the other hand, when the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls reaches "2000" during the big hit, the processes after step S816 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 30 are executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed, the probability change confirmation notification effect is executed in the process of step S820 as shown in FIG. 37 (A). The operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed in the layer lower than the layer.

Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous change number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. 37 (A) As shown in the above, the operation control for executing the continuous chan number notification is performed in the layer lower than the layer on which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S478 in the big hit middle music name notification operation control process of FIG. 33, FIG. 37 (A) ), The operation control for executing the big hit middle song name notification is performed in the layer lower than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

In this way, when the execution periods of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect, the consecutive chan number notification, and the big hit middle song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), the highest layer is used. Along with the probability change confirmation notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect is executed in a layer lower than that, and the consecutive chan number notification and the jackpot middle song name notification are executed in a layer lower than that.

FIG. 38 shows an operation example of displaying a notification image in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the error notification, the prize ball number notification effect, the consecutive chan number notification, and the jackpot music name notification overlap. There is. For example, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet is detected, it does not matter whether or not it is the execution period of the prize ball number notification effect, the consecutive chan number notification, and the big hit music name notification. Instead, in the process of step S143 of FIG. 14, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), the operation control for executing the error notification in the uppermost layer is performed.

On the other hand, when the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls reaches "2000" during the big hit, the processes after step S816 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 30 are executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the error notification is performed, in the process of step S819, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), it is lower than the layer in which the error notification is executed. The operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed in the layer of.

Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous change number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. 38 (A) is shown. As shown in the above, the operation control for executing the continuous chan number notification is performed in the layer lower than the layer on which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S478 in the big hit middle music name notification operation control process of FIG. 33, FIG. 38 (A). ), The operation control for executing the big hit middle song name notification is performed in the layer lower than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

In this way, when the execution periods of the error notification, the prize ball number notification effect, the consecutive chan number notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the error notification is performed in the uppermost layer. Is executed, the prize ball number notification effect is executed in the lower layer, the consecutive chan number notification is executed in the lower layer, and the music name notification during the big hit is executed.

FIG. 39 shows an operation example of displaying a notification image in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the error notification, the probability change confirmation notification effect, the continuous change number notification, and the big hit middle music name notification overlap. .. For example, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet is detected, regardless of whether or not it is the execution period of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the consecutive chan number notification, and the jackpot music name notification. , In the process of step S143 of FIG. 14, as shown in FIG. 39 (A), the operation control for executing the error notification in the uppermost layer is performed.

On the other hand, when a predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied, the processes after step S803 in the probability variation confirmation notification effect operation control process of FIG. 29 are executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the error notification is performed, in the process of step S805, as shown in FIG. 39 (A), the layer is lower than the layer on which the error notification is executed. Operation control is performed to execute the probability change confirmation notification effect in the layer of.

Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed, in the process of step S467 in the continuous change number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. 39 (A) is shown. As shown, the operation control is performed to execute the continuous chan count notification in the layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is executed.

Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability variation confirmation notification effect is performed, in the process of step S477 in the big hit middle music name notification operation control process of FIG. 33, FIG. 39 (A) As shown in the above, the operation control for executing the big hit middle song name notification is performed in the layer lower than the layer on which the probability change confirmation notification effect is executed.

In this way, when the execution periods of the error notification, the probability change confirmation notification effect, the number of consecutive chans notification, and the big hit middle song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the error notification is sent in the uppermost layer. At the same time, the probability change confirmation notification effect is executed in the layer lower than that, the number of consecutive chans is notified, and the song name notification during the big hit is executed in the layer lower than that.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and is a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to be able to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of.

As an example, in the above embodiment, for an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening by using a magnet, for example, an error notification corresponding to a magnetic anomaly notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed. Explained as a thing. On the other hand, as abnormalities, in addition to the above-mentioned radio wave abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, front door opening abnormality, payout mechanism abnormality, illegal winning abnormality of the large winning opening, and the lower plate are full. There may be an abnormality or the like, and the abnormality may be detected by using a sensor group for detecting an abnormality or the like. As for the error notifications in the above-described embodiment, the priority of these abnormalities may be set for each of the other notifications. In that case, the priority may be set for each type of abnormality in consideration of the severity and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the prize ball number notification effect has been described as notifying the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit as a specific period. On the other hand, the specific period may be a period other than the big hit, such as during one round or one minute. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the prize ball number notification effect at an appropriate timing, for example, according to the difference in the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball passes through the large prize opening.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cumulative prize ball notification effect has been described as notifying the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit during the consecutive chan as a special period. On the other hand, the special period may be a period other than during consecutive chans, such as one day or one week. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the cumulative prize ball number notification effect at an appropriate timing according to, for example, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball passes through the large winning opening, the difference in the consecutive chan rate, and the like. it can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the probability change confirmation notification has been described as an example of the notification regarding the state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a mode in which a player is notified that the game ball is passed through a specific area (for example, a right-handed notification), or a jackpot is determined when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, the specific area is given to the player. Notification that the game ball has passed through the above-mentioned predetermined area, notification by probabilistic promotion effect, notification by round number promotion effect, promotion regarding the number of STs or the number of time reductions (increased from the initial number of notifications) (To the effect), notification regarding the pending internal chain (confirmed notification of the reserved internal chain, notification of the expected degree of the pending internal chain), notification regarding the number of STs or the remaining number of time reductions, and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, it has been described that the priority order is determined by setting the Z value for each broadcast image. On the other hand, the priority of each notification is, for example, the error notification is executed with priority over the probability change confirmation notification effect, and the error notification is executed with priority over the prize ball number notification effect, while the error notification and the probability change are executed. When the definite notification effect and the prize ball number notification effect are executed at the same time, the priority of each notification is set according to the combination of the simultaneously executed notifications, such as executing the probability change definite notification effect with priority over the error notification. It may change. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the notification according to the combination of the notifications executed at the same time.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches "5000" or "10000" by winning the final count of the final round, for example, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being produced as the ending effect. Will be executed. However, when the probability variation control is performed after the ending effect is completed, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed during the ending effect, and the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is performed during the fanfare effect when the next big hit occurs. (That is, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be performed after the next big hit occurs and before the big prize opening is opened). Further, instead of the above, at the start of the first round of the next big hit (even if there is no winning in the big winning opening), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be performed, or the first round of the next big hit may be performed. When the first prize is won in, the cumulative number of prize balls may be notified. With such a configuration, even if the ending effect time is short, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect can be suitably executed.

Similarly, when the probability variation control is not performed after the ending effect is completed (for example, when only the high opening control is performed), the next big hit without executing the cumulative prize ball number notification effect during the ending effect. The cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be executed during the fanfare effect when the occurrence occurs, or when the first prize is received at the start of the first round of the next big hit or in the first round of the next big hit. In addition, the cumulative number of prize balls may be notified. When the probability variation control ends (for example, when the number of STs ends) without the next big hit, or when the high opening control ends, when the probability variation control or the high opening control ends. The cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be executed. When the probability variation control is not performed after the ending effect is finished (for example, when neither the probability variation control nor the high opening control is performed), when the first variable display after the ending effect is finished (hold is held). When there is no ending effect), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be executed.

Further, in the above embodiment, when a so-called over-winning occurs in the final round, a notification effect related to the over-winning may be executed during the ending effect, or the first variable display after the end of the ending effect may be displayed. When it is performed (when the ending effect is finished when there is no hold), the notification effect related to the over winning may be executed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the total prize ball number notification effect for notifying the total prize ball number acquired in the big hit game state and the time saving state in the continuous chan may be executed during the big hit. Further, even in such an embodiment, it is sufficient that the priority of the total prize ball number notification effect over other notifications is set. With such a configuration, even when the total prize ball number notification effect and other notifications are executed at the same time, each notification can be preferably executed.

Further, in the above embodiment, regardless of whether or not the jackpot promotion effect is executed, the jackpot promotion effect is completed in the process of step S391 in the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 31. Whether or not it is determined, but before executing such a process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot promotion effect is executed, and if the jackpot promotion effect is executed, step S391 is performed. If the process is executed but the promotion effect during the jackpot is not executed, the process of step S392 and subsequent steps may be executed without executing the process of step S391. With such a configuration, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect can be executed even when the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit in the consecutive chan reaches "5000" or "10000", the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed. Explained as a thing. On the other hand, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is a larger number of prize balls than "10000", such as "5000", "10000", "20,000", "30,000", and so on. It may be executed even when the is acquired. With such a configuration, attention to the cumulative prize ball number notification effect can be continued.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed. On the other hand, even when the prize ball number notification effect is executed, for example, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed in the period before and after the prize ball number notification effect is executed. And the execution period of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may not overlap. With such a configuration, both the prize ball number notification effect and the cumulative prize ball number notification effect can be suitably executed.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the volume status display image VL showing the adjustment status of the volume adjustment is displayed. However, in addition to the volume status display image VL, the display screen of the image display device 5 and the like are displayed. A brightness status display image indicating the adjustment status of the brightness adjustment of the above may be displayed. Further, only the brightness status display image may be displayed instead of the volume status display image VL. For example, the volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 16 and the temporary display process (step S348) shown in FIG. 23 may be changed to a process that enables the volume status display image VL and the brightness status display image to be displayed. .. Further, instead of the volume status display image VL, for example, a mode status display image indicating the mode status which is the execution frequency of the hold change notice may be displayed. Further, the mode status display image may be displayed together with at least one of the volume status display image VL and the brightness status display image.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24C, the volume status display image VL is erased to make it invisible. However, even if the volume status display image VL is displayed in a mode that is difficult to see. Good. For example, the volume status display image VL may be displayed in a semi-transparent display mode, or may be displayed in a very small and reduced display mode (micro display mode). Further, it may be notified that the volume adjustment is always possible. For example, the telop display during the variable display effect may be used to notify that the volume can be adjusted at all times. In addition, the fact that the volume can be adjusted at all times may be notified by the explanatory effect display during the variable display effect. It should be noted that the execution of the telop display and the explanation effect display is not limited to the variable display, and may be possible in a customer waiting state (so-called waiting for a customer), a big hit game state, or the like.

In the above embodiment, during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is not displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 24 (C) to 24 (H) unless requested by the player. However, in the big hit game state, the volume status display image VL may not be displayed unless requested by the player. In this case, the volume status display process shown in FIG. 16 and the temporary display process shown in FIG. 23 may be transformed so as to be executable during the big hit. For example, instead of the determination process of whether or not the super reach effect is being produced in the volume status display process, the determination process of whether or not the jackpot effect is in progress is executed, or each operation flag is transformed into an operation flag according to the jackpot effect. Therefore, the volume status display process can be executed during the big hit. This also applies to the temporary display process. Further, the temporary display process may be modified as a process included in the attacker opening effect process shown in FIG. 28. For example, the temporary display process may be modified as a process to be executed during any of steps S184 to S188, or immediately before or after. When displaying the ending effect, the volume status display image VL may be displayed on the image display device 5 also during the ending effect period. According to such a modification, the volume status display image VL is displayed in response to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of a specific effect (for example, a round effect during a big hit, a blessing effect during a big hit, etc.). It is possible to display (display the adjustment status of the production adjustment), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the detection control by selecting the music during the big hit may be prioritized over the detection control of the adjustment status. That is, the effect adjustment (for example, the status display such as volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, and mode switching) may not be possible during music selection. In particular, it is effective when an operation for selecting a musical piece and an operation for adjusting an effect are performed by the same operating means (for example, a cross button or the like).

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described in the above description, it may be applied to a slot machine. For example, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1, the first state is, for example, a gaming state other than the super reach effect, or a state of waiting for customers and not displaying an error, and a specific effect (for example, the super reach effect). The second state (for example, the gaming state during the super reach production) for executing (for example) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a slot machine, the first state is a gaming state other than continuous production performed over a plurality of games, or a state of waiting for customers and not displaying an error, and a specific production (for example, continuous production). It may be a second state (for example, a gaming state during continuous production) for executing (for example).

Further, as the specific effect, the pachinko game machine 1 may be a blessing effect (character introduction) during a big hit, a promotion effect, a V prize notification, etc., and in the slot machine, AT notification (assist time notification), ART notification (assist). Replay time notification), 1G continuous notification of big hits (1 game continuous notification), continuous notification of big hits, and the like may be used.

In the above embodiment, the "ratio" and "probability" at which various decisions are made are 0% (never determined) or 100% (always), for example, 70:30. It may be set so that it will not be (determined), or at least the probability of one of the determination results will be 0% (never determined) or 100% (always determined). It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, if the ratio of one of a plurality of decision results to be a decision result is higher than the ratio of other decision results, the ratio of one decision result is It may be included that it is 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of 1 as the determination result is 100%, the ratio of other determination results is 0%. Further, when the ratio of other decision results is 0%, if the ratio of 1 decision result is a predetermined ratio other than 100% but not 0%, the ratio of 1 decision result is the other decision result. It will be higher than the ratio.

Further, the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not limited to those that are variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by using a plurality of LEDs, and during the variable display of the special symbol, only a specific (single) LED among the plurality of LEDs is used. Repeats turning on and off, and the other LEDs remain off. Then, when the variable display result is "missing", the LED that repeats turning on and off is maintained in a state of emitting (lighting) with a predetermined emission color, or by maintaining a state of being turned off. Stop display the special symbol. At this time, the other LEDs are kept off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the LEDs are lit. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, a specific (single) symbol can be switched between display and non-display, while other symbols remain hidden. Good. Then, as the final stop symbol (fixed special symbol or final decorative symbol) that results in the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol, any one of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (stop display). Further, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by using a 7-segment LED, and during the variable display of the special symbol, a symbol indicating "-" is displayed (lit). It may be hidden (turned off) repeatedly so that other numbers and symbols are not displayed. Then, as a variable display result of the special symbol, the symbol indicating "-" is not stopped and displayed, and a predetermined lighting pattern including the numbers indicating "1" to "9" and other symbols is obtained. By doing so, the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, the symbols that are not stopped and displayed as a variable display result can be switched between display and non-display, while the other symbols are maintained in the hidden state. You may.

In the above embodiment, one variation pattern designation command is transmitted when the variable display is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the variation pattern indicating the variable display time, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, and the like. Although an example is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 side by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 has a so-called first command before reaching (if it does not reach, so-called first), such as the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous fluctuation in the first command. 2 A command indicating the variable display time and variable display mode before the stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach, if it does not reach). A command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode (after the so-called second stop) may be transmitted. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform the effect control in the variable display based on the variable display time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 120 selects the specific variable display mode to be executed at each timing. You may do it. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, in the next timer interrupt). ) You may send a second command. The variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main side makes a look-ahead judgment and sends a command corresponding to the judgment result to the sub side, but the main side sends a command indicating a random value and the sub side makes a look-ahead judgment. You may try to do it.

In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the light emitter unit, the game effect lamp, and the decorative LED are included. Various production operations and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but a score is scored based on the occurrence of a winning by enclosing the gaming medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that grants.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined by the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 8 includes "probability variation", and the probability variation control condition is set based on the determination result of the jackpot type being "probability variation". It was explained that it was established and controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has won (entered) a large winning opening (second major winning opening) is detected by a probabilistic change detection switch in a probabilistic attacker provided at a predetermined position in the game area. The probability variation control condition is satisfied based on the above, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be controlled to the probability variation state. The big winning opening (second big winning opening) of the probability change attacker can change from the closed state to the open state when the number of executions of the round game in the big hit game state is a predetermined number of times (for example, "15"), and the round When the number of times the game is executed is other than the predetermined number of times, the game may remain closed and cannot be changed to the open state. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the specific region in the attacker, which is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the gaming area. It may be configured to be.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form in which the program and data are distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(1-1) The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) described above includes music reproduction means realized by the effect control CPU 120 in cooperation with the voice control board 13 and the like. Further, the gaming machine is configured so that the music to be played in a specific period (for example, the period in the jackpot gaming state) can be selected from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 18C). Has been done. The music playing means can play the music in a specific period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step S634 in FIG. 17), and is a part of the selected music at the time of selecting the music. A specific portion different from the beginning of the music is reproduced (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 in FIG. 17). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when the music is selected.

The jackpot period in the jackpot game state is a period in which the attacker is repeatedly released, that is, a round game period, but is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot period includes a fanfare effect period executed at the start of the jackpot game state, a period of repeating the attacker opening (round game period), and an ending effect period executed at the end of the jackpot game state. It may be a period. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit game state and notifies that the big hit game state has been reached. The ending effect is an effect that is executed at the end of the jackpot game state to notify the end of the jackpot game state.
In addition, the specific period is not limited to the period in the jackpot game state, and how to determine the period is arbitrary. For example, the specific period may be a super reach production period. In this case, the music determination process shown in FIG. 17 is transformed into a process for determining the music during the super reach period or before the period, and the determined music is transformed into the transformed process or in the reach effect control in step S349. It may be reproduced in processing or the like. Further, the specific period may be in a probabilistic state, a time saving state, or the like.
Moreover, the specific part is not limited to the "chorus" of the music as described above. Depending on the music, a part other than "rust" (such as a verse) may be used as a specific part. Further, the specific part may be the beginning part of the music. That is, the data used as the specific unit may be different depending on the music.

(1-2) Further, in the gaming machine described above, there are a plurality of methods for determining music when selecting music (for example, when a predetermined music determination operation is performed, or the large winning opening is closed in the first round. Then, the music selected in step S631 of FIG. 17 is determined). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when selecting the music.

Since there are a plurality of types of music determination operations, there may be a plurality of music determination methods. For example, there may be a plurality of configurations in which the operation content can be detected according to the operation by the player using a non-contact sensor such as a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or an infrared sensor. In addition, not only in the case where the selected song is determined when the big prize opening is closed in the first round, the music is decided according to the closing of the big winning opening in any round other than the first round. The composition may be such that the music is played or the music is determined according to the end of the first hit. In addition, there may be only one method for determining the music.

(1-3) Further, in the gaming machine described above, it is possible to select a musical piece in an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, during execution of the first round in the jackpot gaming state). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when selecting the music.

The advantageous state may be during a round other than the first round. Further, the advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state. For example, a special gaming state such as a probability change state may be set as an advantageous state, and the number of first rounds in which the maximum number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of jackpot gaming states is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"). The jackpot game state (for example, "15") may be set as an advantageous state. Alternatively, the time saving state in which the upper limit of the variable display that can be executed among the plurality of time saving states is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), may be set as an advantageous state. , The probabilistic state in which the jackpot probability is the first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50) among the plurality of probabilistic states may be set as the advantageous state. In addition, any gaming state that is advantageous to the player may be set as an advantageous state. Further, it may be possible to select a musical piece in a state other than the advantageous state.

(2) Further, the gaming machine described above is a display means (for example, FIG. 19 (for example, FIG. 19), which is an image corresponding to a music played in a specific period at the time of selecting a music and displays an image corresponding to a specific unit. An image display device 5 or the like that displays a music-compatible image in the display area VA1 shown in B) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when the music is selected.

The image corresponding to the specific portion (musical music compatible image) may be a moving image or a still image as described above. Further, the music-compatible image does not have to be displayed when the music is selected.

(3) Further, the gaming machine described above has a storage means (for example, FIG. 19A) for storing one piece of music as voice data divided into a plurality of parts including specific part data indicating the sound of the specific part. As shown, it is equipped with a ROM 121 or the like that stores a plurality of audio data including rust data).
The music reproduction means reproduces a specific part of one music based on the specific part data at the time of selecting a music (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 17), and a plurality of music reproduction means are used in a specific period. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S634 in FIG. 17) by connecting the audio data divided into the two. According to such a configuration, the burden on the data capacity can be reduced.

As described above, the music-compatible image data may be stored in the ROM 121 or the like in a manner divided for each part of the music (as separate image data), similarly to the audio data of the music. In this way, the burden on the data capacity can be further reduced. Further, neither the audio data indicating one music nor the image data corresponding to the music need to be stored in a plurality of divided modes.

(4) Further, according to the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) described above, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), the player's stick is in the gaming state (first state) other than during the super reach production. Since the volume status display image VL (volume adjustment status) is visibly displayed on the image display device 5 regardless of whether or not the controller 31A is operated (player's operation), the volume status is displayed in the gaming state other than during the super reach effect. The displayed image VL can always be visually recognized. Further, in the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect for executing the super reach effect (specific effect), the volume status display image VL is made invisible and the player's stick controller 31A is operated. Displays the volume status display image VL based on the operation of the player's stick controller 31A until a predetermined period elapses (until a predetermined condition is satisfied) after the operation. That is, in the gaming state during the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL can be kept to the minimum necessary. As a result, the volume status display image VL can be displayed in response to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of the super reach effect (specific effect), and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the specific effect is an effect (for example, a super reach effect) that suggests that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to display the volume status display image VL in response to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of the super reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 28 (I) and 29 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative symbol when the fluctuation is stopped, so that the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, that is, , Volume adjustment can be performed while not obstructing the visibility of the game result.

Further, in the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is displayed for a predetermined period (or a predetermined period from the start of displaying the volume status display image VL) after the player detects the operation of the stick controller 31A. Since it is displayed, the display of the volume status display image VL can be kept to the minimum necessary. As a result, the volume status display image VL can be displayed in response to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of the super reach effect (specific effect), and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above description, the first state is a gaming state other than during the super reach effect, but the period before the execution of the super reach effect (before the start) or after the execution of the super reach effect (after the end). It may be in any of the above states. Further, the first state may be at least one of the periods before the execution of the super reach effect (before the start) in one fluctuation and the period after the execution (after the end) of the super reach effect in the one fluctuation. Often, the second state may be the state of the period during which the super reach effect in one fluctuation is executed. Further, the second state may be a special state that tends to be an advantageous state such as a big hit game state. This special state is a probabilistic state or a time saving state. Further, the special state is a state in which the game ball is frequently changed from the first aspect in which the game ball does not win (or may pass or enter) to the variable winning ball device 6B to the second aspect in which it is easy to win. There may be.

Further, before shifting from the game state (first state) other than during the super reach effect to the game state (second state) during the super reach effect, the player responds to the operation of the stick controller 31A (movement of the player). When the display of the volume status display image VL of the volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started and the predetermined condition is not satisfied when shifting from the first state to the second state, that is, the super reach production is in progress, but a predetermined period after the operation. If (3 seconds) has not elapsed, the display of the volume status display image VL is extended from the time of detection or transition of the player's movement until a predetermined period elapses (see FIGS. 31 (A) and 31 (B)). (Refer to "extended display portion"), so that the display of the volume status display image VL can be extended for a predetermined period even after the super reach effect is being produced. That is, it is possible to prevent the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment that was started immediately before the start of the super reach effect from ending halfway at the start timing of the super reach effect, and the display of the volume status display image VL is deleted in the middle. It is possible to prevent the inviting discomfort of being done. Further, it is not necessary for the player to operate the stick controller 31A again immediately after the super reach effect is started, and it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

Contrary to the above, the operation of the player's stick controller 31A (of the player) before shifting from the gaming state during the super reach effect (second state) to the gaming state other than during the super reach effect (first state). The display of the volume status display image VL of the volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started according to the operation), and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied when shifting from the second state to the first state, that is, the super reach effect is completed. If the game is in a game state other than during the super reach effect, but the predetermined period (3 seconds) has not passed after the operation, the volume status display image VL will continue to be displayed even after the transition to the first state. It is possible to eliminate the process of erasing the display of the volume status display image VL when the period elapses. In other words, since the volume status display image VL is always displayed in the first state, it is possible to omit the useless process of erasing the volume status display image VL once after a lapse of a predetermined period and then restarting the display. In addition, it is possible to prevent a feeling of strangeness that the display of the volume status display image VL disappears for a moment at the timing when a predetermined period elapses.

(5) The gaming machine described above is a notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect, an acquired number number notification effect, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect, a cumulative acquired number number notification effect, a probability change confirmation notification effect). , A production control CPU 120 that executes a continuous-chan number notification, a big hit middle song name notification, a right-handed notification, an error notification, and a big hit middle promotion effect). Then, as a notification effect, the notification effect execution means is a first notification effect that notifies the magnitude of the value acquired in a specific period (for example, a prize ball number notification that notifies the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during a big hit). (Direction, etc.) and a second notification effect that notifies the magnitude of the value acquired during the special period (for example, a prize ball number notification effect that notifies the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during a big hit during consecutive chans, etc.) The first notification effect and the second notification effect have different priorities (for example, in the process of step S397 in the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 31, the prize ball number notification effect is generated. If it is being executed, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect will not be executed, etc.). According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

It should be noted that the notification effect executing means can execute a third notification for notifying that a special gaming state (for example, a probability change state) is reached as a notification effect, and the priority of the third notification is higher than that of the first notification. (For example, when the probability variation confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S216 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process shown in FIG. 30, it is lower than the layer in which the probability variation confirmation notification effect is executed in step S220. Performing motion control to execute the prize ball number notification effect in the layer, etc.).
Further, the notification effect executing means can execute a fourth notification (for example, a continuous chan number notification for notifying the number of consecutive chans) for notifying the number of times controlled in an advantageous state in a special period as a notification effect, and the fourth The priority of the first notification is higher than that of the notification (for example, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S462 in the continuous-chan number notification operation control process in FIG. 32, the prize ball number notification is performed in step S468. Operation control for executing continuous-chan count notification in a layer lower than the layer on which the effect is executed, etc.).
In addition, the notification effect executing means is a fifth notification (for example, a jackpot song name notification that notifies the song name being played during the jackpot) as a notification effect that notifies information about another effect executed in a specific period. Is possible, and the priority of the first notification is higher than that of the fifth notification (for example, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S472 in the big hit middle music name notification operation control process in FIG. 33). , In step S478, the operation control for executing the big hit middle song name notification is performed in a layer lower than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.) According to any of these configurations, it is appropriate. Notification can be executed.

In addition, the notification effect execution means is a sixth notification (for example, a jackpot promotion effect that is a notification effect of whether or not to control the probabilistic state) that notifies whether or not a special value is given in a specific period as the notification effect. ) Can be executed, and the execution of the second notification may be restricted until the sixth notification is executed (for example, the jackpot promotion effect in step S391 in the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process shown in FIG. 31). If is not completed, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect will not be executed, etc.). In such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification according to the production situation.
Further, at least one of the various notifications may be executed during the period from the control to the advantageous state to the control to the normal state (for example, during continuous chan). In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the period from the control to the advantageous state to the control to the normal state.

The layer assigned to each of the first notification to the sixth notification is arbitrary. A different layer may be assigned to each notification, or among various notifications, there may be a plurality of notifications to which a common layer is assigned.
Further, any layer may be assigned to the notification of the selected music name and the notification regarding the volume status display (for example, any Z value of 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 35 (A) is being selected. (Assigned to notification of the song name and notification of volume status display, etc.). Further, for example, the display layer of the image data (the image showing the music name and the data of the music-compatible image such as PV) at the time of selecting the music shown in FIG. 19B has Z values of 3, 2 and 3. It may be between 1 and 2. Further, the layer of the image at the time of music selection shown in FIG. 19 (B) and the image after the music is determined shown in FIG. 19 (C) may be changed (the Z value assigned to each may be changed). .. That is, the priority of image display related to the music may be different before and after the music is determined.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later. For example, the present invention does not have to include all of the configurations of the gaming machines described in (1-1) to (1-3) and (2) to (5) above, and can achieve the object. If possible, removing or adding components is optional.

Further, all or a part of the above-described embodiments, the configurations shown in the modified examples, and the configurations shown in the later-described embodiment may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by displaying fluctuations. Therefore, the period display means for displaying the period display (timer display in the second area 9092 of FIG. 55) (effect control microcomputer 90100, effect display device 909 of FIG. 55, second area 9092, timer in S90802 of FIG. 53). (Process to execute the effect, etc.) and when the period display is in the predetermined mode (when the timer display is 0 seconds in the second area 9092 of FIG. 55, etc.), the predetermined effect (super reach effect, etc.) is executed. In a possible predetermined effect executing means (a process of executing a super reach effect in the effect control microcomputer 90100, S90802 of FIG. 53, etc.) and the period display display area (second display area 92 of FIG. 55), the period is concerned. Specific display means (such as the effect control microcomputer 90100, the effect display device 909 of FIG. 55, and S90802 of FIG. 53) capable of displaying a specific display other than the display (specific display such as “?” Shown in FIG. 59). A music reproduction means (for example, a production control CPU 120 for executing step S634 in FIG. 17) capable of reproducing music in a specific period (for example, a period in a jackpot gaming state). The music to be played during the period can be selected from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 18C), and the music playback means is the music selected at the time of music selection. A gaming machine that reproduces a specific portion that is a part of the music and is different from the beginning of the music (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 in FIG. 17).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to improve the effect of producing music when selecting music. In addition, it is possible to pay attention to whether the period display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the period display.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, as a predetermined effect to be executed when the period display is in a predetermined mode, a music selection effect that prompts the player to select a music may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the predetermined production.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, music may be selected during the period when the period display means is displaying the period. Further, as a predetermined effect to be executed when the period display is in a predetermined mode, an effect in which the selected music is reproduced may be executed. Even in such a configuration, since a specific part different from the beginning of the music is reproduced when the music is selected, the music can be preferably selected even when the period of the period display is short.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, in the display area of the period display, a display related to the music may be performed as a specific display other than the period display. The display related to the music may be, for example, a selection screen display for selecting a music, or a display (song title, lyrics, etc.) indicating the music being played when the music is being played. According to such a configuration, the display area of the period display can be effectively utilized, and the interest of the game can be improved in the process before the period display is executed.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the period display, it is possible to perform a variable display and control the advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. A game machine (pachinko game machine 901, etc.), which is a period display means (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, effect display device 909, No. 5 in FIG. 55) for displaying a period display (timer display in the second area 9092 of FIG. 55). When the period display is in a predetermined mode (when the timer display becomes 0 seconds in the second area 9092 of FIG. 55, etc.) and when the timer effect is executed in the second area 9092 and S90802 of FIG. 53, etc.) A predetermined effect execution means (processing of executing the super reach effect in S90802 of FIG. 53, a computer 90100 for effect control, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined effect (super reach effect, etc.) and a display area of the period display (FIG. 55). In the second display area 92), a specific display means (such as the effect control microcomputer 90100, which is capable of displaying a specific display (specific display such as “?” Shown in FIG. 59) other than the period display), the effect display of FIG. 55 A gaming machine including the device 909 and the process of executing the specific display in S90802 of FIG. 53) can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as coin gaming machines and slot machines may be used, and any gaming machine capable of playing a game may be used. For example, any gaming machine may be used.

[First other form example]
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 40 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as viewed from the front. FIG. 41 is a hit type table.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball as a gaming medium is driven into the gaming area 907 to play a game. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape which is provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906). In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a gaming ball as a gaming medium is driven into the gaming area to play a game.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving plate 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball, and the like are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 904 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and is formed by the player. A stick controller 90122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right) is attached. The stick controller 90122 is designated by a player holding the operating rod of the stick controller 90122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand) and pressing and pulling the stick controller 90122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 90125 (see FIG. 42) capable of instructing operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 90121 (FIG. 42) for detecting a predetermined instructing operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 90125 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 90122. See) is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 42) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 90122. Further, the stick controller 90122 includes a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIG. 42) for vibrating the stick controller 90122.

On the member forming the ball striking plate (upper plate) 903, for example, the player presses a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate main body on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 90122) to perform a predetermined instruction operation. A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 90124 (see FIG. 42) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 90120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 90120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 40, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may be set to be closer to the left or right on the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be, for example, in a horizontal positional relationship. As the operating means, other operating means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

Near the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 as a first display means capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as variable display) an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided. On the right side of the effect display device 909 in the game area 907, there is a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 908a that variablely displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. A second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 908b that variablely displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each of them is provided.

Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 909 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and on the display screen, an effect symbol display area for performing a variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provided. Be done. In the effect symbol display area, for example, a symbol display area for variable display of three decorative (effect) effect symbols, left, middle, and right, is formed.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 908a and 908b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator.

Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 909 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 908a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 908b is used to display the effect. (2) When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

More specifically, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition or the second starting condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 9013). Or, after passing through the second start winning opening 9014 (including winning), the start condition of the variation display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is started based on the fact that the display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. In addition, the passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate as a winning area, and a concept including that the game ball has entered (winned) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

When the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, or when the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the derivation display is performed, the effect display device 909 also derivates and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbols) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this way, it is controlled to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) as an advantageous state in which an advantageous value (advantageous value) is given to the player.

Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed in a state that matches (combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. Then, the effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called a reach effect.

Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 909 form a part of the jackpot combination, the variable display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. It is a display state, or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, the reach means a state in which the identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed in a state in which the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area, for example. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

The display effect in the reach state is the reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during reach, unusual effects may be performed with lamps or sounds. This production is called reach production. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect symbol or the like)) can be displayed, or a display mode (for example, color or the like) of a background image of the effect display device 909 can be displayed. ) May be changed. The change in the display of the character and the display mode of the background is called the reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than in a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by the solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win the second starting winning opening 9014 than the first starting winning opening 9013. Further, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 9013 than the second starting winning opening 9014. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

Above the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b consisting of four indicators that display the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of second hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided, and a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The gaming machine is a hitting ball launching device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting ball operation handle 905 and launches the game ball into the gaming area 907 by using the rotational force of the driving motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if it is in a state where the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the first 1), the first special symbol display 908a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless it is possible to start the variable display of the first special symbol, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if it is in a state where the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the second 2), the second special symbol display 908b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless it is possible to start the variable display of the second special symbol, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

The effect display device 909 is used for decoration (for effect) during the variation display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and the variation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. The variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 909. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 909, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number (total hold storage number) is displayed. , Hold display area, not shown). In the total hold storage display unit, as the hold storage display, the number of hold storage images can be specified by, for example, the number of displayed images of a predetermined image (by displaying one hold storage image corresponding to each of the hold storage information). Specify the number of pending memories.) Is displayed. In this way, by providing the total hold storage display unit that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the start condition of the variable display. In each of the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and the effect display device 909, the light emitting display and the image display for indicating the number of hold storages are hold display or hold. It is called a memory display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 9020 repeatedly continuously controls the open state and the closed state. In the repetitive continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 9020 is open is called a round. As a result, repetitive continuation control is also called round control. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of big hits are provided, and when it is decided to make a big hit, one of the big hit types is selected.

On the left side of the effect display device 909, an ordinary symbol display 9010 for variablely displaying ordinary symbols that can identify each of them is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is configured to display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9 in a variable manner. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes from to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of LEDs that are lit is reduced by one.

At the bottom of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 901 (not shown).

In the hit type table of FIG. 41, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

Specifically, in the big hit game state, after the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened, the end condition of the predetermined open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or It is closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is satisfied (opening end condition). Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot game state reaches the predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

Of the "big hits", the probabilistic state is a state in which after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than the normal state (normal gaming state that is not the probabilistic state) as a special gaming state. The type of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for a probability fluctuation state, also called a high probability state) is called a "probability variation jackpot". Further, in this embodiment, as the special gaming state, when the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is controlled to the time reduction state which is shorter than the non-time reduction state in association with the probability variation state. There is. It should be noted that the special gaming state may be controlled to a time saving state independently of the probability change state.

In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that when the time saving state is reached, an effective start winning prize is likely to occur and a big hit game may be performed. Increase. Of the "big hits", the type of big hit that does not shift to the probabilistic state after being controlled to the big hit game state of 15 rounds is called "normal big hit".

Further, as a special gaming state, the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 9015 is increased by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened in association with the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be controlled to the electric chew support control state that facilitates (higher approach, higher frequency) winning of the variable winning ball device 9015. Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as described later, it is mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

Here, the electric chew support control will be described. The electric chew support control includes control that shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) so that the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), and the normal symbol. Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a hit symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened. Control (control to increase the number of times of opening) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 9014 is high. Is increased, and it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the start (it becomes easier to satisfy the execution conditions of the variable display in the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909). As a result of this control, the frequency of winning the second start winning opening 9014 increases, so that the gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variation display of the second special symbol increases.

The state in which the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 9014 is increased by the electric chew support control (high frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls according to the winning to the number of shot balls. Since the "base" is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a "high base state". When such control is not performed, it is called a "low base state". Further, such a control is a variable winning ball device 9015, that is, a control that facilitates winning a prize in the variable winning ball device 9015 by supporting the winning with the electric tulip, and is called "electric chew support control".

In this embodiment, "high probability state (probability change state)" and "low probability state (non-probability change state)" are used as terms indicating a state of jackpot probability, and as a term indicating a combination of base states. , "High base state (electric chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-electric chew support control state)" are used.

Further, in this embodiment, "low probability low base state", "low probability high base state", and "high probability high base state" are used as terms indicating a combination of the jackpot probability state and the base state. Use. The "low probability low base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a low base state. The "low probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a high base state. The "high probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state and the base state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 41, as the 15-round jackpot, a plurality of types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot controlled into a non-probability change state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the normal jackpot, the condition that the non-probability state continues for a period until the next jackpot occurs, the time saving state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times that the fluctuation display is executed 100 times, and the next jackpot It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of the above, is satisfied. The normal jackpot may be controlled so as to be a jackpot controlled in a non-probability change state, a non-time saving state, and a non-electric chew support control state (low probability low base state).

The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to a probability variation state, a time saving state, and a high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. Note that FIG. 42 also shows a payout control board 9037 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit. Includes 9057. The game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer having a ROM 9054 and a RAM 9055 built-in. The game control microcomputer 90560 also includes a random number circuit 90503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all of the RAM 9055 is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 9055 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or processes) the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056). Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 9031.

The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and is generated at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the start winning time when the numerical data is read (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 90503.

Further, an input driver circuit 9058 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. In addition, the output circuit 9059 that drives the solenoid 9016 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015 and the solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020 forming the big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 90560 is also main. It is mounted on the substrate 9031.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 includes a first special symbol display 908a for variable display of special symbols, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010 for variable display of normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold storage. The display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 is performed.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90100, ROM 90102, RAM 90103, VDP 90109, an I / O port unit 90 105, and the like. The ROM 90102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 90103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 90102 and the RAM 90103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 90100. The VDP 90109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 90100 to control the display of the effect display device 909.

The effect control microcomputer 90100 is an effect control command for instructing the effect content from the game control microcomputer 90560 via a relay board 9077 that allows signals to pass in only one direction from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. In addition to controlling the fluctuation display of the effect display device 909, the display of the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side is controlled via the lamp driver board 9035, and from the speaker 9027 via the audio output board 9070. Performs various production controls such as controlling the sound output of.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action to the trigger button 90125 of the stick controller 90122 is detected from the trigger sensor 90121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. Enter via. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 90120 has been detected from the push sensor 90124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 90122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 to the I / O port unit 90105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 vibrates the stick controller 90122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 90105.

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 43, the type of random number, the update range, the use, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R': A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R'is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1'(MR1'): Determine the type of jackpot (type, normal jackpot, or any type of probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2'(MR2'): Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 3'(MR3'): Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 4'(MR4'): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determining a normal symbol hit). (6) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining the initial value of random 4').

In this embodiment, as the jackpot in the specific gaming state, a plurality of types of a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot are included. Therefore, when a big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit judgment random number (random R'), the big hit type is one of these based on the value of the big hit type judgment random number (random 1'). It is decided by the jackpot type of. Further, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1'). Therefore, the random number 1'is also a random number for determining the jackpot symbol.

Further, the variation pattern is first determined by using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2'), and is included in the determined variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3'). Determine one of the fluctuation patterns. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern type is sometimes called a fluctuation type.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, and a reach variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type with reach.

Such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the non-time saving state when the display result is out of order. When is, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time is not shortened. For example, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the non-time-shortening state in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time as compared with the non-time-shortening state, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The rate at which the variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected is high, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time is not shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed fluctuation is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number reduction control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number reduction control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the hold number reduction control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 44A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R'is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change state) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 44 (A) is set as a jackpot determination value, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, it is described in the right column of FIG. 44 (A). Each numerical value is set as a jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number) of jackpot judgment values (referred to as the probability variation jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value) is set. .. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R'). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 44 (A). If any of the jackpot determination values shown in (1) is matched, it is determined to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 44 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit.

FIGS. 44 (B) and 44 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. 44 (B) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the first hold memory) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 9013 (the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed). This is the first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used for (when performed). FIG. 44 (C) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the second hold memory) based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 9014 (the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed). This is the second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for (when performed).

Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIGS. 44 (B) and 44 (C) is used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1') of, the type of jackpot is determined to be either "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", and is referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (B), the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1'and the determination value corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type). Judgment value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1'and the determination value corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type). Judgment value) is set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 (B) and 44 (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 9056 determines as the jackpot type the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1'values match, and as the jackpot symbol, the jackpot symbol in which the random 1'values match. To determine. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (C) have the same ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the jackpot type determination table between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when selecting the jackpot type from among a plurality of types of jackpots having different maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game state as the jackpot type, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (C) is used in FIG. 44. It may be set so that the ratio of selecting the jackpot type having a large number of rounds is higher than that of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the selection of the type of jackpot is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (C) may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (B). .. By doing so, the rate of the probability variation jackpot can be made higher in the variation display of the second special symbol than in the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a variation pattern table used for selecting and determining variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols in the game control microcomputer 90560 will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a tabular format.

In FIG. 45, (a) shows a table for determining when the normal state is out, and FIG. 45 (b) shows a table for determining when the time saving state is out. Further, (c) shows a normal jackpot determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation jackpot determination table. Each of the determination tables of FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (d) is stored in the ROM 9054, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used for determining (determining) the variation pattern type and the variation pattern.

The determination table shown in FIG. 45 is a variation pattern type determination table showing the relationship between the random 2'and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table showing the relationship between the random 3'for each variation pattern type and the variation patterns belonging to each type. And include.

In the "variation pattern type" or "variation pattern" column in each table of FIG. 45, "normal" or "normal variation" indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

Further, the "normal reach" in each table of FIG. 45 shows a fluctuation pattern of the normal reach that does not perform a particularly flashy effect when the reach state is reached. "Super reach" indicates a variation pattern in which a reach effect is performed to display a special effect image when the reach state is reached.

Further, as described above, "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern in which the ratio of selection when a big hit is made is higher than that of "normal reach", and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than that of the "normal reach" (for example, the normal reach is 10 seconds and the super reach is 50 to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the degree of expectation of a big hit (a big hit) is such that the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach. (Possibility) is high.

The "expectation degree" is a concept including an expectation degree for a big hit, an expectation degree for a probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big hit (also referred to as reliability) is the degree of expectation (the ratio of a big hit) that becomes a big hit when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, the reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the jackpot is 60 times, the expectation for the jackpot is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) of the jackpot is 60%). Further, the degree of expectation for the probability change means the degree of expectation (ratio of probability change) to shift to the probability change state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined effect is produced in the effect display device 909 from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol as the identification information and the variable display of the first and second special symbols until the display result is derived and displayed. An effect called pseudo-ream as an embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as pseudo-ream effect) may be executed. The pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed, which is originally a one-time fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous fluctuation.

In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the fluctuation time determined for one start prize in order to make it appear as if the variable display (variable display) of the symbol was executed a plurality of times for one start prize. Refers to a special fluctuation pattern (also called a fluctuation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed (repeated) a predetermined number of times for all the symbol sequences (left, middle, right). For example, the greater the number of repeated executions of re-variation (the total number of fluctuations including the initial fluctuation and the subsequent re-variation, also called the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations), the higher the reliability of the jackpot (the number of fluctuations will be different from the jackpot). The degree of the ratio selected when a big hit is obtained, the degree of the ratio of a big hit, that is, the degree of reliability of a big hit) is increased with respect to all the selection ratios including time. More specifically, by increasing the ratio of selection when the jackpot is determined, it is suggested by the pseudo-continuous production whether or not the jackpot game state is reached. In the pseudo-ream variation pattern, a pseudo-ream symbol (for example, a symbol (number) to which a predetermined character or character is attached, which is not included in the effect symbol that is normally variablely displayed (basically variable display) on the effect display device 909). (Also referred to as a symbol without a mark or a symbol dedicated to pseudo-ream)) is temporarily stopped. In the pseudo-ream, the effect symbol (numerical symbol in the present embodiment) that is normally displayed in a variable manner (basically a variable display) may be temporarily stopped. The combination of symbols that are temporarily stopped in the effect display device 909 is called a combination of temporarily stopped symbols. The combination of the temporary stop symbols is determined from among a plurality of types of chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as pseudo consecutive chance eyes) consisting of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. It should be done.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, an effect in which the effect symbol slides may be performed. Here, slipping refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol is stopped in the variable display. In the second super reach, after that, in the left and right symbol display areas, one of the two effect symbols that was temporarily stopped at the out-of-order (combination of out-of-order symbols) slips and then stops to reach the reach (reach). It is an effect that forms a combination of symbols) and executes a reach effect.

It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern shown in the deviation time determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “off”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of "normal jackpot". The fluctuation pattern shown in the probability variation jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of "probability variation jackpot".

Based on this information, for example, the fluctuation pattern of "fourth super reach (80 seconds)" shown in the column of "variation pattern" in FIG. It is shown to be a "fourth superreach variation pattern" executed in seconds.

In the table of FIG. 45, the columns described as "random 2'range" and "variation pattern type" serve as a variation pattern type determination table section showing the relationship between the "random 2'range" and the "variation pattern type". This is a column showing the function. For example, in FIG. 45A as an example, all the values of random 2'(1-251) are set in each of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types such as "normal", "normal reach", and "super reach". It is divided into multiple numerical ranges and assigned. For example, in FIG. 45A as an example, the value of random 2'extracted at a predetermined timing matches any of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random values of 1 to 251. Then, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern type is "normal reach".

Further, in the table of FIG. 45, the columns described as "random 3'range" and "variation pattern" function as a fluctuation pattern determination table unit showing the relationship between the "random 3'range" and the "variation pattern". It is a column indicating. The fluctuation patterns shown corresponding to each type of the fluctuation pattern type determination table are the fluctuation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 45 (a) as an example, the fluctuation patterns belonging to the type of "super reach" are "first super reach", "second super reach", "third super reach", and "first super reach". 4 Super Reach ".

All the values of random 3'(1-220) are assigned to each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type by dividing them into a plurality of numerical values. For example, taking FIG. 45 (a) as an example, when it is decided to use the fluctuation pattern type of "super reach", the random 3'extracted at a predetermined timing is among the random values of 1 to 220. When it matches any of the determination values assigned to 1 to 70, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the "first super reach (50 seconds)" is used.

When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of alignment, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the variation display result is out of alignment in the non-time saving state, the out-of-time determination table in the normal state of FIG. 45A is selected. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the variation display result is out of order, the time saving state out of time determination table shown in FIG. 45B is selected. By using the determination tables of FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the reach ratio is kept constant when the normal state is out of the normal state and when the time saving state is out of the range, regardless of the number of holdings.

When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit regardless of whether the time is shortened or not, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the variation display result is a normal jackpot, the normal jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 45 (c) is selected. When the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot regardless of whether or not the time is shortened, the probabilistic jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 45 (d) is selected.

In the time saving state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 45 (b), the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that of the normal state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 45 (a). Then, in the time saving state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 45 (b), the fluctuation time is shorter than the reach variation (including the normal reach variation and the super reach variation) as compared with the normal state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 45 (a). The ratio determined for normal fluctuation (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation (variation that results in out-of-reach display result without reaching)) is high, and the ratio determined for reach fluctuation with a longer fluctuation time than normal fluctuation is low. The data is set.

As a result, the rate of selection of fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times is higher in the non-time saving state than in the non-time saving state (normal state), so that in the non-time saving state, the non-time saving state is selected. The fluctuation display is performed with a fluctuation time that is shorter on average than in the case of. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. Further, by setting the normal fluctuation so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion in the time-saving state.

In the judgment tables of FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b) selected when the data is out of alignment, the data is set so that the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high-low relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been done. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIGS. 45 (c) and 45 (d) selected when a big hit occurs, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high-low relationship such that normal reach <super reach. The data is set. As a result, when a big hit occurs, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the case of the loss, so that the reach of the super reach is increased. By producing the effect, the player's expectation can be raised.

Further, in the determination table of FIG. 45 (d) selected when the probability variation jackpot is obtained among the jackpots, the normal reach is achieved as compared with the determination table of FIG. 45 (c) selected when the jackpot is a normal jackpot. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach effect is high. As a result, when it becomes a probabilistic jackpot, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the proportion occupied by the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the normal jackpot. By performing the reach production of the reach, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player for the probable change jackpot.

In addition, such a fluctuation pattern is when the total reserved storage number (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be variable-displayed is a predetermined number or more (for example, the total reserved storage number is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different depending on whether the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the fluctuation time is compared with the case where the total number of reserved storages is less than the predetermined number. May be executed to reduce the number of holds. However, even under the condition that the hold number shortening control is executed (for example, the total number of hold storages is 3 or more), the expectation for reach is maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant. Further, it is also possible to execute the hold number time reduction control so that the fluctuation time is not shortened only in the super reach among the reach. Further, the hold number time reduction control may be feasible by making the normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time selected at a high rate, or may be feasible by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself. The combination may be used.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the game control microcomputer 90560, as shown in FIG. 46, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIG. 46 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating the variation pattern of the effect symbol to be variablely displayed on the effect display device 909 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 45, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 90101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 909 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (symbol confirmation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot game state for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A1XX (H) is a designated command indicating that the large winning opening is open for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command designated after opening the large winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies that the game state is a normal state (low probability state). The command B001 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a probability change state designation command that specifies that the game state is a probability change state (high probability state).

The command C0XX (H) is a total hold storage number designation command indicating the total hold storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total hold storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total hold storage number is subtracted by 1. In this embodiment, the total hold storage number designation command is executed when the game ball starts winning the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 (for example, when the start opening switch passing process described later is executed). , Sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (see S901221 and S901232 in FIG. 50). Further, the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100 at the start of the variation display (for example, when the special symbol variation display processing process described later is executed). The total hold storage specification command and the hold storage number subtraction specification command may also be used. For example, the total hold storage number specification command may be used as a command that can specify the hold storage number after subtraction. It should be noted that the production control microcomputer 90100 sends a command capable of specifying the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, respectively, not as the total reserved storage number, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. The total value of and may be specified as the total number of pending storages.

The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning judgments such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014. This is an effect control command that indicates the content. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see S901217 and S901228 in FIG. 50), whether or not the game control microcomputer 90560 is a big hit at the time of starting winning, the type of big hit, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined which judgment value range the value of is in. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 90100. A value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the variation type command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit and the type of the big hit at the time of starting winning, based on the value set in the symbol designation command. The fluctuation pattern type can be recognized based on the fluctuation type command.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a hold storage buffer in the game control microcomputer 90560.

FIG. 47 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area). The hold specific area is formed in the RAM 9055 (the area in the RAM 9055), and as shown in FIG. 47 (A), the maximum value of the value of the total hold storage counter that counts the total hold storage number (8 in this example). ) Corresponding area is secured. FIG. 47 (A) shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage counter is 5.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A), the reserved specific area is "first" or "second" in the order of winning based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014. The data to be shown is set. Therefore, in the reserved specific area, data that can specify the winning order to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 is stored. The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 9055.

FIG. 47B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area (hold storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold storage. As shown in FIG. 47 (B), a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055. In the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R'), which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1'), which is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination. Random numbers (random 2') and random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns (random 3') are stored.

Based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, the CPU 9056 extracts such random values from the random number circuit 90503 and a random counter for generating software random numbers, and obtains them. The process of saving (storing) in the storage area in the 1-hold storage buffer or the 2nd hold storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Further, based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014, these random values are extracted and stored in the second holding storage buffer.

In this way, the storage of the above-mentioned information regarding the start winning prize in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as "hold storage". Further, the numerical data stored in the first hold storage buffer may be referred to as the first hold storage information, and the numerical data stored in the second hold storage buffer may be referred to as the second hold storage information. The random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2') and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3') are not extracted and stored in the storage area at the time of starting winning, but the variation pattern setting described later. It may be extracted at the time of processing (at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol).

The data stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area in this way is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display. In addition, before starting the variable display, which is subject to the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" by reading the data stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area at the time of starting prize, the special symbol It may be used for a look-ahead notice effect that can be executed based on the hold information of the variable display of.

When there is a start prize in the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, commands such as a symbol designation command, a variation type command, and a total hold storage number designation command are sent from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. Will be sent. In the start winning winning command buffer provided in the RAM 90103 of the effect control microcomputer 90100, various commands such as received symbol specification commands, variation type commands, and total hold storage number specification commands can be stored in association with each other. A storage area for storing data that can identify the received command is secured.

In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the effect symbol variation display operation and reach. It is composed of data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the production display operation in the production and the like, or various production operations that do not involve the variable display of the production symbol. Further, the advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data or the like indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data and the like indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically interrupted at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, initialization processing at normal time, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 90503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern). Random number update processing for initial values (update processing for the initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) and the like are executed.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. 48. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (S9020). Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and their states are determined (switch processing: S9021). ..

Next, the CPU 9056 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 9041 is executed (S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the normal symbol display 9010, control to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S9032 and S9033. To execute.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number and a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S9023). .. The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S9024, S9025).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol process process (S9026). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the large winning opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

Next, a normal symbol process process is performed (S9027). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: S9028). Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (S9030).

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S9032).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). S9033). Further, the CPU 9056 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting the drive signal in S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S9034), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S9026). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the start port switch passage process is executed (S90312). Then, depending on the internal state, any one of S90300 to S90307 is performed.

In the game control microcomputer 90560, as described above, the RAM 9055 stores the hold storage data (first hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the first start winning opening 9013. The first hold storage buffer to be stored, and the second hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage data (second hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the second start winning opening 9014. Is provided. In each of these hold storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of storages of each hold storage (4 in this example) is secured.

In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 9013a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is the number of stored data on condition that the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). Numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from a random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number by increasing the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting. Random numbers) are extracted, and the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "first" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 9014a is on, the second hold storage number is counted on the condition that the second hold storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the hold storage counter is increased by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern) are extracted from a random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "second" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed.

The processes of S90300 to S90307 are as follows. The special symbol normal processing (S90300) is a processing for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and a determination of the big hit type when the display result is a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S90301) determines the variation pattern (determines the variation pattern using the random number for determining the variation pattern type and the random number for determining the variation pattern), and clocks the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for controlling the start of timekeeping of the variable time timer for the purpose.

The display result designation command transmission process (S90302) is a process of controlling the transmission of the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. The special symbol changing process (S90303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S90304) displays the fluctuation on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b when the passage of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying the stopped symbol.

The large winning opening pre-opening process (S90305) is a process of controlling the opening of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 9020 according to the type of big hit. The processing during opening of the large winning opening (S90306) confirms the control of transmitting the effect control command for the round display effect during the big hit game state to the microcomputer 90100 for effect control and the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening. It is a process for performing processing and the like. If the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S90305). When all the rounds are completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process (S90307). The jackpot end process (S90307) is a process of performing control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S90312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 9013a is in the ON state (S901211). If the first start port switch 9013a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S901222. When the first start port switch 9013a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the first hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold storage for counting the first hold storage number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (S9011212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S901222.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (S901213) and increases the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Increase by 1 (S901214). Further, the CPU 9056 is a total hold storage in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order in the first start winning opening 9013 or the second start winning opening 9014 described with reference to FIG. 47. The data indicating "first" is set in the area corresponding to the value of the number counter (S901215).

In this embodiment, when the first start port switch 9013a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 9013), the data indicating "first" is set. When the second start port switch 9014a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins the second start winning opening 9014), the data indicating "second" is set. For example, in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 9056 sets 01 (H) as data indicating "first" when the first start port switch 9013a is turned on. When the second start port switch 9014a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as the data indicating "second". In this case, if there is no corresponding hold storage, 00 (H) is set in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

As shown in FIG. 47 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total hold storage counter value is secured in the hold specific area, and the first start winning opening 9013 or the first start winning opening 9013 or , Data indicating that the winning order is "first" or "second" is set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Therefore, in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 is stored.

Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 47 (B)) (see FIG. 47 (B)). S901216). In the processing of S901216, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R'), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1'), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2'), and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3'). Is extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning effect process that determines in advance the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (S901217). Then, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S901218), and transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (S901219). Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (S901220), sets the value of the total hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and issues the total hold storage number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (S901221).

By executing the processes of S901218 and S901219, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), the first Every time the start winning opening 9013 is started, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the processing of S901218 to S901221 is executed and a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 9013, a symbol designation command, a variable type command, and a first starting winning winning designation command are generated. And a set of four commands of the total hold storage number specification command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 9014a is in the ON state (S901222). If the second start port switch 9014a is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 9014a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold storage for counting the second hold storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (S901223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the second hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the second hold storage number counter by 1 (S901224) and increases the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Increase by 1 (S901225). Further, the CPU 9056 sets the data indicating "second" in the area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage number counter in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (S901226).

Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 47 (B)) (see FIG. 47 (B)). S901227). In the processing of S901227, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R'), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1'), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2'), and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3). ´) is extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 9056 executes the winning effect processing (S901228). Then, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S901229), and also controls to transmit the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. (S901230). Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (S901231), sets the value of the total hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and issues the total hold storage number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (S901232).

By executing the processes of S901229 and S901230, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), the second Every time a start prize is won in the start prize opening 9014, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the processing of S901229 to S901232 is executed and a start winning is generated in the second starting winning opening 9014, a symbol designation command, a variable type command, and a second starting winning winning designation command are generated. And a set of four commands of the total hold storage number specification command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process (S90300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (S9051). If there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, if the customer wait state specification command has not been sent yet, the customer wait state specification command that specifies the customer wait state mode is executed. The process for transmitting is performed (S9077), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting state specification command is transmitted, the customer waiting state specification command transmission completed flag indicating that the customer waiting state specification command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting state specification command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting state specification command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait state specification command. Such a customer waiting state specification command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, the CPU 9056 determines that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area (see FIG. 47 (A)) is "first". It is confirmed whether or not the data indicates (S9052). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "first" (that is, the data indicating the "second") (N of S9052), the CPU 9056 uses the special symbol pointer (first). Data indicating "second" is set in the flag) indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (S9053). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "first" (Y in S9052), the CPU 9056 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (S9054).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a is set according to whether the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer or the data indicating "second" is set. The variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b are executed by using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Is done. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b is based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer. Is performed.

By executing the processes of S9052 to S9054, in this embodiment, the first special symbol is changed and displayed in the order of the starting winnings in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 9055 and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055 (S9055). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 9055. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 9055.

Then, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

After executing the process of S9056, the count value of the total hold storage number counter formed in the RAM 9055 and counting the total hold storage number is decremented by 1 (S9057). The CPU 9056 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055, and shifts the contents stored in the reserved specific storage area.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1. Further, the CPU 9056 adds up the values (values indicating "first" or "second") stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of pending storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m-1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of reserved storages are extracted always coincides with the order of the total number of reserved storages = 1 to 8.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 9014, that is," second "indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of S90300 to S90307 can be standardized between the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads a random R'(random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S9061). In this case, the CPU 9056 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in S901216 of the start port switch passage process and S901227 of the start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot. To do. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 44) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability changing state (normal gaming state). Specifically, the number of jackpot determination values is probabilistically changed between the probability variation jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 44 (A) in ROM 9054 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 44A in ROM 9054 is set) is provided, which is set to be less than the hour jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the game state is in the probability change state, and when the game state is in the probability change state, performs the jackpot determination process using the probability change jackpot determination table, and the game state is the normal play. When the state or the time is shortened, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R') matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 44 (A), the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y of S9061), the process proceeds to S9071. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the jackpot end process (S90307 in FIG. 49) when the probability variation jackpot is reached, and then the condition that the next jackpot is determined, or the variation display that is the result of the missed display. Is reset at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed when the condition that the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed is satisfied.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R') does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in S9061), the process proceeds to S9075, which will be described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R') in S9061 matches any of the big hit determination values, the CPU 9056 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (S9071). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 44 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 44 (C) are used. One of the determination tables is selected (S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 44 (B). Further, the CPU 9056 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 44 (C) when the special symbol pointer indicates "second".

Next, the CPU 9056 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and holds them using the jackpot type determination table selected in S9072. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1') for determining the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer are determined (S9073).

As shown in FIGS. 44 (B) and 44 (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol differs for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 9055 (S9074). For example, when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 9056 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (S9075). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined by S9073 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability variation jackpot", "7" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "normal jackpot", "3" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (S90301) (S9076).

In the display result designation command transmission process (S90302) described above, the CPU 9056 is one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 3 designation command that specifies the display result according to the determined type of jackpot or the loss. Controls to transmit the effect control command (see FIG. 46).

Further, in the above-mentioned special symbol change processing (S90303), the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer, and when the fluctuation time timer times out, the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (S90304). Update to the value and proceed to the special symbol stop processing.

When a big hit is obtained as a result of the fluctuation display, the big hit opening pre-processing (S90305), the big winning opening opening processing (S90306), and the big hit end processing (S90307) are executed to control the big hit game state. Will be done. In the jackpot end processing (S90307), the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set at the end of the probability variation jackpot, and the time reduction flag is set at the end of the normal jackpot. As a result, after the end of the probabilistic jackpot, it is controlled to the probabilistic state and the time saving state, and after the end of the normal jackpot, it is controlled to the time saving state.

The probabilistic jackpot and the time saving state after the normal jackpot need to be continued until either of the conditions of the fluctuation display being executed 100 times and the occurrence of the next jackpot are satisfied. For such a continuation period of 100 times of fluctuation display, in the jackpot end processing (S90307), the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is set to 100 times, and every time the fluctuation display is executed thereafter. It is managed by subtracting and updating in the special symbol stop processing, and the time saving flag is reset based on the count-up of the time saving number counter, so that the time saving state is controlled to end.

Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 90100 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) is performed (S90701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets data such as a flag capable of identifying what the received effect control command is. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify the received command in various command storage areas provided in RAM 90103) and the like are performed (command analysis processing: S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the effect control process process (S90705). In the effect control process process, in order to perform various effects such as variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S90704, the current control of each process according to the control state is performed. Select the process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) and execute the effect control.

Next, random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (SR1'-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1'-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol. ´-3, SR2'for determining the area effect execution timing, SR3'for determining the area effect execution timing, SR4'for determining the first area effect, SR5'for determining the second area effect) A random number update process for updating the count value is executed (S90706). Each of these random numbers SR1'-1 to SR5'is generated by the count of a random counter whose count value is updated by software, and is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each of them. It is used as a random number by being extracted at a predetermined timing.

Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving, erasing, etc. of the hold display) is executed (S90707).

By executing such an effect control main process, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the effect display device 909, various lamps, and the effect display device 909, and various lamps, according to the effect control command transmitted and received from the game control microcomputer 90560. By controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 9027L and 9027R, various effect controls are performed according to the game state.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S90705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 52. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and after executing the look-ahead effect process (S90500) for selecting the type of the look-ahead effect, the value of the effect control process flag. Any of the processes S90800 to S90807 is performed according to the above.

In the effect control process process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also controlled by the second special symbol. Control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of is also executed in one effect control process process.

The pre-reading effect processing (S90500) is a process for determining pre-reading such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining the effect mode when executing the pre-reading effect. The look-ahead effect is a change in the special symbol based on the hold information (holding memory information) before the turn of the display (symbol change) of the special symbol arrives. It is a production technique that determines the content of the display and gives a notice at a stage before that what the variable display of the special symbol will be in the future. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, a big hit may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information before the variable display by the hold information is executed. A kind of effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. In the following, the variable display based on the hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect will be referred to as “target variable display”.

The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800) is a process for confirming whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 90560. If the variation pattern command is received, the process shifts to the effect symbol variation start processing.

The effect symbol variation start process (S98001) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) to be started. The effect symbol changing process (S90802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern. The effect symbol variation stop process (S90803) is a process of stopping the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and controlling to derive and display the display result (final stop symbol) of the variation display.

The jackpot display process (S90804) is a process of performing display control such as control of displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of a jackpot after the end of the fluctuation time. The process during the round (S90805) is a process for controlling the display during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the process proceeds to the round post-processing, and if the final round is completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process. The round post-processing (S90806) is a process for controlling the display between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the processing during the round. The jackpot end effect process (S90807) is a process of performing display control in the effect display device 909 to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

The effect control CPU 90101 is a process stored in the ROM 90102 from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display, and during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state. The effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 909 is controlled according to the process data set in the table.

The process table is composed of process timer setting values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and controls to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S98001) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the following process.

In the effect symbol variation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variation display result is out of alignment (S90601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of order is determined by, for example, whether or not the display result 1 designated command is stored in the display result designated command storage area. If it is determined to be out of order, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (S90602). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined, for example, by the data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

When it is determined that a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the display result of the missing symbol that does not reach is determined as the final stop of the effect symbol by using the data table for determining the missing symbol stored in the ROM 90102 (S90604). , S90616. In the data table for determining the outlier symbol, the numerical data of SR1'-1 to SR1'-3 is associated with each of the plurality of types of effect symbols.

In the processing of S90604, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1'-1 to SR1'-3 at a predetermined timing, and the data table for determining the missing symbol is used, and the symbols corresponding to the extracted numerical data are on the left. , Middle, and right are determined as a combination of stop symbols that will result in variable display of the effect symbols. In this way, when determining the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with the combination of jackpot symbols by chance, it is corrected so as to be the combination of out-of-reach symbols (for example). Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by shifting it by one symbol). If the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number happens to be a reach symbol, it is corrected so that it is a combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols (for example, the right symbol is corrected by shifting one symbol) and each stop symbol is used. Is determined.

When it is determined in the process of S90602 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that the pattern is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination of the reach symbols is determined (S90605), and the process proceeds to S90616. In the processing of S90605, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1'-1 to SR1'-3 at a predetermined timing, and a data table for determining an outlier symbol is used to correspond to the random numbers extracted from SR1'-1. The symbol to be used is determined as the stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state, and the symbol corresponding to the random number matching the counter value extracted from SR1'-2 is determined as the stop symbol of the middle symbol. To. Further, in this case as well, when a combination of jackpot symbols is accidentally made, each stop symbol is determined by correcting the combination of outlier symbols (for example, correcting the middle symbol to be shifted by one symbol).

Further, when it is not decided to make a deviation in the processing of S90601 (when it is decided to make a big hit) (N of S90601), the effect control CPU 90101 has a big hit symbol according to the type of big hit. The stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination is determined (S90603), and the process proceeds to S90616.

In S90603, the combination of hit symbols is determined according to the type of big hit as follows. Based on which of the display result 2 specified command and the display result 3 specified command is stored in the display result specific command storage area, the type of jackpot is selected from the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot. When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from SR1'-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1'-1 and the probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, Using a data table (probability change jackpot symbol determination table) in which the relationship with odd-numbered doublets such as "7, 7, 7" on the left, middle, and right is set, any probability change from the extracted value Select and determine the combination of jackpot symbols. When it is determined that the normal jackpot is decided, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from SR1'-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1'-1 and the normal jackpot symbol (for example, left, Using a data table (normal jackpot symbol determination table) in which the relationship with even-numbered doublets such as "4, 4, 4" is set in the middle and right, one of the normal jackpot symbols from the extracted values Select and determine the combination of. The symbol determined in this way is used as the final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the jackpot game state.

Next, the first area effect and the second area effect as the area effect executed in this embodiment, and the special effect and the timer effect executed in the first area effect will be described.

[1st area production]
The first area effect is all the effects executed in the first area 9091 (see FIG. 55) located at the lower left of the effect display device 909 when the variable display based on the hold storage information is executed. During the execution of the first area effect, the timer is displayed after the special effect described later is executed to execute the timer effect, or the so-called Gase effect ("Gase" is "Gase" is "Gase"). The effect of executing (including the meaning of "false") is executed. The first area effect is not limited to the first area 9091, and may be executed in any display area of the effect display device 909.

[Special production]
In the special effect, the timer effect is executed after the execution of the special effect by executing the "visible / hidden display" in which the timer frame 9097 suggesting the execution of the timer effect is displayed or not displayed in the first area 9091. It is a production that shows a suggestion that suggests that. After executing the special effect for a predetermined time, the timer effect or the Gase effect that does not execute the timer effect is executed from the special effect. The special effect is not limited to the above-mentioned effect, and may be any effect that suggests the execution of the timer effect. For example, the special effect may be an effect that encourages whether or not the semi-transparent timer frame is materialized.

[Timer production]
The timer effect is a timer by updating the period display that shows the effect period such as the waiting time until a specific effect is executed after the execution of the special effect in the timer display format when the variable display based on the hold storage information is executed. This is an effect of executing one of a plurality of types of effects when the display is in a predetermined mode. In the timer display, the timed value that is counted down is updated from the initial value of the timed value set at a predetermined timing, and finally, the value of the timer display becomes 0 (a value indicating 0 seconds). Such a timer display displayed during the timer effect is displayed in the first area 9091 for a predetermined period during the variable display.

[Second area production]
The second area effect is a plurality of types of predetermined displays that suggest the display result of the variation display and the effect to be executed during the variation after executing the specific effect described later when the variation display based on the hold storage information is executed. An effect of displaying one of the predetermined displays is executed. The second area effect is not limited to the second area 9092, and may be executed in any display area of the effect display device 909.

The specific effect is an effect that suggests that one of a plurality of types of predetermined displays is displayed. After executing the specific effect for a predetermined time, one of a plurality of types of predetermined displays suggesting an effect state or a game state such as "?", "NEXT", and "READY GO" is displayed. As a specific effect, for example, a virtual rotating reel with all predetermined displays is rotated for a predetermined time at a speed at which it is not possible to visually recognize which predetermined display is displayed, and then gradually rotated. After slowing down to make the predetermined display visible, an effect of stopping at a position where one predetermined display can be visually recognized is executed. The specific effect is not limited to the above-mentioned effect, and may be any effect that suggests that one of a plurality of types of predetermined displays is displayed. Further, the predetermined display includes a timer effect suggestion display suggesting a timer effect and a plurality of types of specific displays other than the timer effect suggestion display. The specific display will be described later (see FIG. 59).

FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the area effect including the first area effect and the second area effect. FIG. 55A is a diagram showing a display example of the effect display device 909 at the start of fluctuation when the area effect is not executed. FIGS. 55 (b) to 55 (d) are diagrams showing a display example of the effect display device 909 during the first area effect. FIGS. 55 (e) and 55 (f) are diagrams showing a display example of the effect display device 909 during execution of the second area effect. In FIG. 55, the state in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are being displayed in a variable manner is indicated by three downward arrows.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the display area of the effect display device 909, a display area of the first area 9091 capable of executing the first area effect is provided on the lower left side, and the second area effect is provided on the lower right side. A display area of an executable second area 9092 is provided. In the first area 9091, basically, an image related to the area is not displayed, and an image related to the area is displayed as needed. In FIG. 55 (a), in the second area 9092, an image relating to the area is always displayed.

FIG. 55A shows a state in which neither the first region effect nor the second region effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol. Specifically, nothing is displayed in the first region 9091 shown by the broken line in the figure. In the second area 9092, a frame portion that can be identified as the second area 9092 is displayed. Further, the area inside the frame portion is displayed in a display mode such as indicating a shutter (not shown), and the shutter portion is normally closed. Then, the shutter portion opens when the second region effect is executed.

The image of the timer effect displayed when the first area effect is executed in the first area 9091 is the timer frame 9097 and the timer display displaying the timer numerical value in the timer frame 9097 as shown in FIG. 55 (d). It is composed of 9094. Each image of the timer frame 9097 and the timer value is displayed in one of a plurality of display colors, for example white and red (see FIG. 58).

When the first area effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the first area 9091, the timer frame 9097 of the color selected from the plurality of display colors is reciprocated in the direction of the arrow in the design. By displaying the image to be displayed, a special effect of "visible / hidden display" is executed, in which the display area of the effect display device 909 is repeatedly displayed or not displayed.

After the execution of the special effect, the Gase effect as shown in FIG. 55 (c) or the timer effect as shown in FIG. 55 (d) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the Gase effect is an effect in which the timer effect is not executed, and nothing is displayed in the first area 9091 by erasing the timer frame 9097 that has been displayed and hidden. It becomes a state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), when the timer effect is executed, the timer frame 9097 that has been displayed and hidden is displayed in one of a plurality of types of display colors in the first area 9091. To. Then, in the timer frame 9097, the timer display 9094 appears and is displayed in any one of a plurality of types of display colors, and a time counting period such as "10:00" indicating 10 seconds is indicated as a timer numerical value. .. In the timer effect, after such a time counting period is indicated on the timer display 9094, the countdown time counting on the timer display 9094 is started.

In the timer effect, when the countdown of the timer display 9094 progresses and the timer value of the timer display 9094 reaches "00:00" indicating 0 seconds, the effect control for starting the super reach effect specified by the variation pattern command at the start of the variation. Is executed.

In this way, when the first area effect is executed, after the timer display 9094 is displayed in the first area 9091 and the timer effect is executed, a predetermined effect such as the super reach effect can be executed. As a result, when the special effect of displaying and hiding the timer frame 9097 is executed in the first area effect, the player can pay attention to whether or not the timer effect is executed.

Further, after the special effect shown in FIG. 55 (b) is executed, the timer effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 55 (d) or may not be executed as shown in FIG. 55 (c). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before the timer effect is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the first region 9091, the timer effect is produced by executing a special effect suggesting that the timer display 9094 is executed by displaying the timer frame 9097 in a visible and hidden manner. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not it is executed, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the timer effect.

When the second area effect is executed in the second area 9092, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), in the specific effect, “?”, “NEXT”, and “NEXT”, as described above, within the frame portion of the second area 9092. , "READY GO" and the like, a plurality of types of predetermined displays suggesting an effect state or a game state are sequentially displayed as indicated by arrows in the figure. Then, after a lapse of a specific period from the start of the specific effect, one of a plurality of types of predetermined displays is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 55 (f). In the figure, an example is shown in which the predetermined display of "extreme heat" is stopped and displayed.

In the second area effect, when any kind of predetermined display is stopped and displayed in the second area 9092, the effect corresponding to the stopped displayed predetermined display is subsequently executed. For example, when a predetermined display of "READY GO" is designated and displayed, a predetermined timer effect is executed. Further, when the predetermined display of "NEXT" is designated and displayed, the above-mentioned pseudo-ream effect is executed.

In this way, after the second area effect is executed, various effects corresponding to the predetermined display stopped and displayed in the second area 9092 can be executed. As a result, when the second specific effect is executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the display of the second area 9092, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the first other embodiment, the special effect is an effect of executing the "visible / hidden display", but the present invention is not limited to this, and any effect suggesting the execution of the timer effect may be used. For example, it may be an effect of displaying a semi-transparent timer frame or an effect of displaying a virtual rotating reel with a plurality of types of timer values and rotating the rotating reel. Further, the specific effect is an effect of rotating a virtual rotating reel, but the effect is not limited to this, and any effect suggesting that one of a plurality of types of predetermined displays is displayed may be used. For example, a virtual shutter may be displayed in the second area 9092 to open and close the shutter, or a predetermined display may be semi-transparently displayed in the second area 9092.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a region effect execution determination table for determining the presence / absence of execution and determining the type of effect to be executed for the area effect including the first area effect and the second area effect. The area effect execution decision table includes (A) a jackpot time area effect execution decision table and (B) an out-of-order area effect execution decision table. Each of these area effect execution decision tables is stored in ROM 90102.

The jackpot area effect execution determination table (A) is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the jackpot display result. The out-of-order area effect execution determination table (B) is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the deviation display result.

In each of the area effect execution decision tables (A) and (B), a total of 100 numerical values of random numbers SR2'(numerical range of 0 to 99) for determining the area effect execution do not execute any area effect (effect). None) It is assigned to a decision to execute only the first area effect, a decision to execute only the second area effect, and a decision to execute both the first area effect and the second area effect. For SR2', the number of allocated random numbers is shown for the sake of clarity.

In the jackpot area effect execution determination table of (A), the value of SR2'extracted at a predetermined timing indicates that "no effect <first area effect only <second area effect only <first area effect + second area effect". The data is set so that the selection ratio is "both".

In the out-of-range area effect execution decision table of (B), "no effect> first area effect only> second area effect only> first area effect + second area effect" depending on the value of SR2'extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the selection ratio is "both".

Data is set as follows in each area production execution determination table of (A) and (B). At the time of a big hit, the data is set so that at least one of the area effects including the first area effect and the second area effect is selected and executed at a higher rate than at the time of the loss.

Specifically, the data is set so that the rate at which only the first region effect is executed is higher at the time of a big hit than at the time of a miss. At the time of big hit, the data is set so that the ratio of executing only the second area effect is higher than that at the time of losing. At the time of a big hit, the data is set so that the ratio of both the first area effect and the second area effect being executed is higher than that at the time of the loss. At the time of a big hit, the ratio at which both the first area effect and the second area effect are executed is higher than the ratio at which only the first area effect or only the second area effect is executed, as compared with the case at the time of the loss. The data is set.

As described above, each of the first region effect and the second area effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio in each of the big hit time and the off time. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's interest in each of the first region effect and the second area effect at the time of the big hit and at the time of the off-game.

In addition, each of the first area effect and the second area effect is executed at a higher rate at the time of a big hit than at the time of a miss. As a result, when each of the first region effect and the second area effect is executed, the player can increase the expectation for the big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, at the time of a big hit, the ratio in which both the first area effect and the second area effect are executed is higher than the ratio in which only the first area effect is executed, and the ratio in which only the second area effect is executed. Is also expensive. As a result, when both the first area effect and the second area effect are executed, the player is compared with the case where only the first area effect is executed or only the second area effect is executed. It is possible to raise the expectation for the big hit in the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the area effect execution determination table, the selection rate of the first area effect and the selection rate of the second area effect may be the same or different for each of the big hit time and the off time. Further, in the area effect execution determination table, at the time of a big hit, the ratio of both the first area effect and the second area effect being executed may be lower than the ratio of executing only the first area effect, and the second area may be executed. It may be lower than the rate at which only the production is performed. Further, in the area effect execution determination table, both the first area effect and the second area effect may be executed only at the time of a big hit. Further, in the area effect execution determination table, both the first area effect and the second area effect may not be executed. Further, at the time of a big hit, the data may be set so that at least one of the area effects including the first area effect and the second area effect is selected and executed at a lower rate than at the time of the loss.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 56, it is possible to individually determine each effect to be executed by using different random numbers for determination, instead of collectively determining the area effect.

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing an area effect execution timing table for determining the execution timing of the area effect when at least one of the area effects is decided to be executed in the area effect execution decision table of FIG. 56. Is. The area effect execution timing determination table includes (A) a large hit area effect execution timing determination table and (B) an out-of-order area effect execution timing determination table. These area effect execution timing determination tables are stored in the ROM 90102.

The jackpot area effect execution timing determination table (A) is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the jackpot display result. The out-of-order area effect execution timing determination table (B) is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the deviation display result.

In each of the area effect execution timing determination tables (A) and (B), a total of 30 numerical values of the random numbers SR3'(numerical range of 0 to 29) for determining the area effect execution timing are the first, which is the start of the variable display. Is assigned to a plurality of timings, that is, the timing of the above and the second timing of before the start of reach. For SR3', the number of allocated random values is shown for the sake of clarity.

In the big hit area effect execution timing determination table of (A), the data is set so that the selection ratio of the magnitude relation of "at the start of fluctuation display <before the start of reach" is set according to the value of SR3'extracted at a predetermined timing. Has been done. In the out-of-bounds area effect execution timing determination table of (B), the data is set so that the selection ratio of the magnitude relationship of "at the start of fluctuation display> before the start of reach" is set according to the value of SR3'extracted at a predetermined timing. Has been done. Here, the “before the start of reach” refers to the timing before a predetermined time in the reach state in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern in which the reach state is reached during the fluctuation display.

As described above, the area effect including the first area effect and the second area effect can be executed at a timing selected from a plurality of timings at the time of the big hit and at the time of the deviation. As a result, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect pattern of the area effect. Furthermore, it is possible to draw attention to the player at which timing the area effect is executed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, for the area production including the first area effect and the second area effect, the selection ratio of the timing for executing the effect differs between the time of the big hit and the time of the miss, so from the viewpoint of expectation for the big hit, at any timing. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the area production is executed, and to enhance the interest of the game.

An example is shown in which the execution timing is selected and determined from two types of execution timings as the execution timings of the area effects based on the area effect execution timing determination table of FIG. 57. The execution timing may be selected and determined from the execution timings of. Further, as the execution timing of the area effect, a part or all of the selectable execution timings may be different between the first area effect and the second area effect. Further, the execution timing of the second region effect may be a part or all of the selectable execution timings different depending on the type of the effect to be executed.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing a first area effect determination table for determining the effect content (effect pattern) when it is determined to execute the first area effect in the area effect execution decision table of FIG. 56. Is. The first area effect determination table includes (A) a first area effect determination table at the time of a big hit and (B) a first area effect determination table at the time of loss. These first area effect determination tables are stored in ROM 90102.

The jackpot first area effect determination table (A) is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the jackpot display result. The first area effect determination table at the time of deviation of (B) is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the deviation display result.

In each of the first area effect determination tables (A) and (B), a total of 65 numerical values of random numbers SR4'(numerical range of 0 to 64) for determining the first area effect are a plurality of types of first area effect. It is assigned to the production content (production pattern) of. For SR3', the number of allocated random values is shown for the sake of clarity.

In the first area effect, the effect pattern of the effect content of "special effect only", which is an effect in which the timer effect is not executed after the special effect of "visible / hidden display" is executed, and the special effect of "visible / hidden display" are executed. It is roughly divided into the production patterns of the production contents of "special production + timer production", which is the production in which the timer production is executed after being performed. "Special effect only" is a so-called ghost effect (fake effect) in which the "timer effect" is not executed by pretending that the "timer effect" is executed by executing the "special effect" that displays "visible and hidden". ..

In each of the first area effect determination tables of FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B), as "special effect only", a special effect of "visible and hidden" the first area 9091 in which the frame color of the timer frame 9097 is displayed in white is provided. An effect pattern that does not execute the timer effect after execution can be selected.

In each of the first area effect determination tables of FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B), the following first effect patterns to third effect patterns can be selected as "special effect + timer effect". In the first effect pattern, after executing a special effect of "displaying and hiding" the first area 9091 in which the frame color of the timer frame 9097 is displayed in white, the frame color of the timer frame 9097 and the timer numerical color of the timer display 9094 are displayed in white. The timer effect displayed in is executed. In the second effect pattern, after executing a special effect of "displaying and hiding" the first area 9091 in which the frame color of the timer frame 9097 is displayed in white, the frame color of the timer frame 9097 and the timer numerical color of the timer display 9094 are changed to red. The timer effect displayed in is executed. In the third effect pattern, after executing a special effect of displaying and hiding the first area 9091 in which the frame color of the timer frame 9097 is displayed in red, the frame color of the timer frame 9097 and the timer numerical color of the timer display 9094 are displayed in red. The timer effect is executed.

In each of the first area effect determination tables (A) and (B) of FIG. 58, there is one type of "special effect only" and three types of "special effect + timer effect" as described above, for a total of four types of effect. A total of 65 numerical values of SR4'are assigned so that one effect pattern can be selected and determined from the patterns.

In the jackpot first area effect determination table of (A), according to the value of SR4'extracted at a predetermined timing, "only the special effect in the white timer frame <special effect in the white timer frame + white timer frame and white timer" Numerical timer effect <Special effect with white timer frame + Red timer frame and timer effect with red timer value <Special effect with red timer frame + Red timer frame and timer effect with red timer value " The data is set so that it becomes the selection ratio.

In the first area effect determination table at the time of disconnection (B), depending on the value of SR4'extracted at a predetermined timing, "only special effect in the white timer frame> special effect in the white timer frame + white timer frame and white timer Numerical timer effect> White timer frame special effect + Red timer frame and red timer value timer effect> Red timer frame special effect + Red timer frame and red timer value timer effect " The data is set so that it becomes the selection ratio.

In this way, as the timer frame 9097 to be displayed and hidden during the special effect, one of a plurality of types of special effects, that is, a special effect that displays the white timer frame 9097 and a special effect that displays the red timer frame 9097, is used. By being feasible, it is possible to pay attention to which kind of special effect is executed.

In each area production determination table of (A) and (B), data is set as follows. At the time of a big hit, the rate at which "special effect only" is selected and executed is lower than at the time of loss, and the rate at which either "special effect + timer effect" is selected and executed is higher. It is set.

In this way, the selection ratio of the timer effect in the first area effect differs between the time of loss and the time of big hit. As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the selection ratio of the execution timing of the first area effect is different between the time of the loss and the time of the big hit, and the selection ratio of the timer effect in the first area effect is different between the time of the loss and the time of the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to pay more attention to the timing at which the special effect is executed.

Further, at the time of a big hit, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting and executing the "timer effect" with the red timer frame and the red timer numerical value as the "timer effect" is higher than that at the time of the loss. Further, at the time of a big hit, the data is set so that the rate at which the "special effect" in the red timer frame is selected and executed as the "special effect" is higher than that at the time of the loss.

As described above, with respect to the first region effect, the rate at which the "special effect" in the red timer frame is selected and executed is higher than that at the time of the big hit and the time of the loss. As a result, when the "special effect" in the red timer frame is executed, the player's expectation for a big hit can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, at the time of a big hit, the ratio of selecting and executing the "timer effect" with the red timer frame and the red timer numerical value is higher than that at the time of losing. As a result, when the "timer effect" with the red timer frame and the red timer numerical value is executed, the player can increase the expectation for the big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, since the white timer frame display / hidden display can be executed even before the red timer numerical display is executed, a special effect of displaying the white timer frame display / hidden is executed. Even so, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the jackpot game state from dropping.

In the first area effect determination table, the effect pattern of "special effect only" in the red timer frame may be selectable for each of the big hit time and the off time. In addition, in the first area effect determination table, for each of the big hit time and the off time, as "special effect + timer effect", the special effect in the red timer frame + the white timer frame and the timer effect with the white timer numerical value are displayed. It may be selectable. Further, in the first area effect determination table, for each of the big hit time and the off time, as the "timer effect", the timer effect with the white timer frame and the red timer value, and the red timer frame and the white timer value are used. Like the timer effect, a timer effect in which the color of the timer frame and the color of the timer value are different may be selectable. In that case, at the time of big hit, the selection ratio of the timer effect is that both the color of the timer frame and the color of the timer value are red, and one of the color of the timer frame and the color of the timer value is It may be set to be higher than the selection ratio of the timer effect in white and the other in red.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a second area effect determination table. The second area effect determination table is a data table used for a lottery for selecting and determining the effect content of the second area effect when it is determined to execute the second area effect. The second area effect determination table includes the second area effect determination table at the time of a big hit in FIG. 59 (A) and the second area effect determination table at the time of loss in FIG. 59 (B). These second region effect determination tables are stored in the ROM 90102 provided on the effect control board 9080.

When it is decided to execute the second area effect, the content of the effect to be executed in the second area 9092 is determined. The effect content executed in the second area 9092 is the effect content of whether to display the timer effect suggestion display or a plurality of types of specific displays other than the timer effect suggestion display in the second area 9092. Is. In the second area 9092, an effect of determining one predetermined display among the displays that are sequentially rotated and displayed from a plurality of types of predetermined displays is executed. The predetermined display includes a timer effect suggestion display and other specific displays. When the timer effect suggestion display is displayed in the second area 9092, the character "READY" is displayed from a plurality of types of displays in the second area 9092, and then the character is switched to the character "GO" after a predetermined time elapses. The second area effect is executed. Further, as the second area effect, a timer effect of displaying a timer after the character "GO" is started.

Apart from such a timer display (timer effect suggestion table display), a specific display may be displayed in the second area. The specific display is a display that suggests that the display result of the variable display is expected to be a big hit or enters a predetermined reach effect. In the present embodiment, the contents of the effect executed in the second region will be described with reference to the table of FIG. 59.

In FIG. 59, the display of "?" Is a display showing a pattern of a Gase effect that does not perform any effect by pretending to perform some effect. The display of "?" Is a display pattern indicating that the currently executed variation display has the lowest jackpot expectation, and the player can hardly expect the variation display being executed. In FIG. 59, the display of "No way?" Is a display pattern in which some kind of effect is expected to be executed. Here, some kind of effect is an effect in which a predetermined character appears or characters or the like indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit are displayed. The display of "No way?" Is a display pattern indicating that the jackpot expectation of the variable display currently being executed is low, but the jackpot expectation is slightly higher than the display of "?".

In FIG. 59, the display of "NEXT" is a pseudo-ream suggestion display indicating that the pseudo-ream is executed after the display is executed. Pseudo-ream is a pseudo-continuous variation, which is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed, although it is originally a one-time variation corresponding to one reserved memory. It is an abbreviation indicating. In FIG. 59, the display of "battle" is a battle reach suggestion display suggesting that the battle effect is executed after the reach. The battle reach is a reach effect in which a ally character and an enemy character fight each other. If a friendly character defeats an enemy character, it will be a big hit, and if a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character, it will be a big hit.

In FIG. 59, the display of the "zone" is a zone entry suggestion display indicating that the zone effect is entered after the display is executed. The zone effect is an effect indicating that the current variable display is in an advantageous state for the player (a state in which the player is in an advantageous zone for the player). Specifically, by flowing a telop of the characters "zone entry" around the screen of the effect display device 909, the current variable display is an effect that indicates that the jackpot expectation is high. In the zone production, the background and the production are unique to the zone production along with the characters "zone entry".

In FIG. 59, the display of "READY GO" suggests that after the characters of "READY" are displayed for a predetermined time as described above, the characters are switched to the characters of "GO", and then the timer display is started. It is a timer effect suggestion display. In FIG. 59, the display of "extreme heat" is a display pattern indicating that the jackpot expectation of the variable display currently being executed is high. After the display of "super heat", a production with high expectation of big hit is executed. In addition, the "Congratulations" display is a display that confirms that the currently executed variable display will be the jackpot display result. Such a display is the most pleasing display for the player.

In the big hit second area production determination table of FIG. 59 (A), the display selection ratio is "super heat> READY GO> zone> battle> NEXT> no way? = Congratulations, depending on the value of SR5'extracted at a predetermined timing. The data used to select the display type to be stopped and displayed in the second area effect is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of ">?". Further, in the second area production determination table at the time of deviation in FIG. 59 (B), the display selection ratio is "extreme heat <? <READY GO <zone <battle <NEXT <" according to the value of SR5'extracted at a predetermined timing. The data used to select the display type to be stopped and displayed in the second area effect is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of "No way?".

With regard to the display excluding "?" And "Congratulations" due to the data settings in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), when the display result of the variable display is the jackpot display result, it is compared with the case where the display result is off. , The display type to be stopped and displayed in the second area production is selected so that the display selection ratio has a magnitude relationship of "super heat> READY GO> zone> battle> NEXT> no way?". Therefore, the jackpot expectation is high according to the order of the magnitude relation of the selection ratio. In addition, the display of "Congratulations" is not selected at the time of a miss, but is selected at the time of a big hit. Therefore, although the ratio of "Congratulations" selected is low, when "Congratulations" is selected, it is confirmed that the display result of the variable display is a big hit. In addition, regarding the display of "?", The rate of selection is set higher in the case of a miss than in the case of a big hit. However, the selection ratio of the "?" Display is not set so high as compared with other displays, whether it is a big hit or a miss. This is because, in the first place, the area effect is an effect that is executed based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, which has a high expectation of a big hit, so that the Gase effect is not executed so much.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (e), 55 (f) and 59, when the second region effect is executed, a timer effect suggestion display such as "READY GO" is displayed and the timer effect is executed, and then the super reach is performed. A display suggesting that the effect is executed and a display suggesting that an effect other than the timer effect such as "?" Is executed can be selected and executed, so that the display suggesting the timer effect can be displayed. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display suggests an effect other than the timer effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before the timer effect is executed.

Further, as display patterns in the second region 9092, a timer display pattern such as the “READY GO” display shown in FIG. 59 that displays a timer effect suggestion display and a timer display, and a “?” Display shown in FIG. 59 are displayed. By providing a display pattern of the specific display that displays the specific display, it is possible to pay attention to whether the timer effect is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and the process before the timer effect is executed is further enjoyed in the game. Can be improved.

In addition, as a specific display, an expectation degree suggestion display suggesting an expectation degree controlled by a jackpot game state, such as the display of "No way? (Low expectation degree)" and "Intense heat (high expectation degree)" in FIG. 59. By including, it is possible to pay attention to whether the timer display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the specific display.

Further, as a specific display, a timer display is displayed by including a revariation suggestion display suggesting that a pseudo-ream display such as "NEXT (pseudo-ream suggestion)" in FIG. 59 is displayed. It is possible to pay more attention to whether the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to pay more attention to the display mode of the specific display.

Further, as the specific display, the reach suggestion display suggesting the type of reach effect such as "battle (battle reach suggestion)" in FIG. 59 is included, so that the timer display is displayed or the specific display is further displayed. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not it is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to pay more attention to the display mode of the specific display.

Next, the process for setting various effects including the area effect will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (S90616). In FIG. 60, among various settings included in the effect setting process in the effect symbol variation start process, the process related to the setting of the area effect is shown. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines various effects to be executed in the area effect by performing the following processes.

First, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display executed this time is the fluctuation pattern of super reach based on the fluctuation pattern command received at the time of this fluctuation (S90901). The received variation pattern command is stored in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 90103. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 90103, and determines whether or not the super reach variation pattern is obtained depending on whether or not the super reach variation pattern command is stored in the area indicating the variation display executed this time. judge. If it is not a fluctuation pattern of super reach, the process proceeds to S90909. If it is a fluctuation pattern of super reach, the value of SR2'is extracted, and one of the ones shown in FIGS. Select the area effect execution decision table of, and use the selected table, and from the value of SR2'extracted, whether or not the area effect is executed in the current variation display, and the type of effect to be executed (first area effect, first (Type of two-region production) is determined (S90902). Whether or not the display result of the current variation display is a big hit is determined by the display result command or the like received when the current variation display is executed to determine whether or not the display result of the variation display executed this time is a big hit. ..

In S90903, it is determined that the area effect is executed (either the execution of only the first area effect, the execution of only the second area effect, or the execution of both the first and second area effects) based on the determination result of S90902. It is determined whether or not it is (S90903). When it is determined in S90903 that the area effect is not executed, the process proceeds to S90909. When it is determined in S90903 that the area effect is to be executed, the value of SR3'is extracted, and depending on whether or not the display result of the variation display this time is a big hit (or not), FIG. 57 (A), One of the area effect execution timing determination tables shown in (B) is selected, and the area effect execution timing in the current variation display is determined from the extracted SR3'value using the selected table (S90904). Next, it is determined whether or not the content determined in S90902 is the content for executing the first region effect and the second area effect (S90905).

If it is determined in S90905 that the content is to execute the first area effect and the second area effect, the value of SR4'is extracted, and the display result of the current variation display is a big hit or not (missing). One of the first area effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B) is selected, and the selected table is used to execute the first area effect in the current variation display from the extracted SR4'value. The content (effect pattern) of the effect to be produced is determined (S90906). Next, in S90907, the selection of the timer effect among the second area effects is restricted. Specifically, in the table of FIG. 59, the display of "READY GO", that is, the display of the timer effect suggestion is not selected. Next, the value of SR5'is extracted, and one of the second region effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B) is determined according to whether or not the display result of the variation display this time is a big hit (or missed). Is selected, and the content (effect pattern) of the effect to be executed as the second area effect in the current variation display is determined from the extracted SR5'value using the selected table (S90908). Then, the process proceeds to S90909.

In S90905, if it is not the content to execute the first area effect and the second area effect, it is determined whether or not the content is to execute the first area effect (S90910). In S90910, if it is determined that the content is to execute the first area effect, the value of SR4'is extracted, and the display result of the variation display this time is a big hit or not (missing), and FIG. 58 (A) is shown. , (B) Select one of the first area effect determination tables, use the selected table, and from the extracted SR4'value, the content of the effect executed as the first area effect in the current variation display ( The production pattern) is determined (S90911).

In S90910, if it is not the content to execute the first area effect, it is determined by the elimination method that the content is to execute the second area effect. Therefore, the value of SR5'is extracted and the variation display of this time is performed. The second area effect determination table shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B) is selected according to whether or not the display result of is a big hit (or missed), and the SR5'extracted using the selected table is used. From the value of, the content (effect pattern) of the effect to be executed as the second area effect in the current variation display is determined (S90912). Then, the process proceeds to S90909.

In S90909, the content determined in the first area effect and the second area effect, and other effect contents based on the content determined in the effect other than the area effect are determined. After that, the process ends.

Here, specific examples of other effect contents determined in S90909 will be described with particular focus on the effects executed in the first area effect and the second area effect. For example, when it is decided to execute the timer effect in the first area 9091 after executing the special effect as the first area effect, the timer display 9094 appears in the timer effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at that time. Various effects related to the timer effect (super reach specified by the fluctuation pattern command) such as the timer value of the timer display displayed as the time counting period when the timer is set, and the effect mode executed when the timer value reaches 0 seconds. The effect content stored in the ROM 90102) is determined according to the type of. In this embodiment, the timer value when the timer display 9094 appears is fixedly set to, for example, 10:00 (seconds) regardless of the type of super reach. The timer value when the timer display 9094 appears may be set differently depending on the type of super reach. Further, in the second area effect, for example, when it is decided to execute the timer effect, the content of the timer effect is also determined in the same manner.

In addition, when it is decided to execute an effect other than the timer effect in the second area effect, various effect contents related to those effects such as the effect mode (determined using the second area effect determination table). The effect content stored in the ROM 90102 is determined in response to the effect). For example, when the effect of "extreme heat" is selected and determined as the effect of the second area, the telop "extreme heat" is displayed at a predetermined display position in the display area of the effect display device 909. Corresponding to the display of "extreme heat", various effects related to the effect to be executed in the display area other than the second area 9092 are determined.

Further, as an effect other than the timer effect, for example, when it is decided to execute the timer effect in the second area effect, the timer display 9094 is displayed in the timer effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at that time. The timer value of the timer display displayed as the timing period when it appears, and the content of the effect executed when the timer value reaches 0 seconds (ROM90102 corresponding to the type of super reach specified by the fluctuation pattern command). The content of the production stored in is determined.

In this way, when it is decided to execute various effects such as the first area effect and the area effect including the second area effect in the effect setting process, the determined contents are stored in the ROM 90102 to execute the effect pattern. The first area effect and the second area as shown in FIG. 55, for example, based on the data related to the effect pattern set in the effect setting process by the effect symbol changing process (S90802) shown in FIG. 53. Area production including production becomes feasible.

[Second other form example]
In the second other embodiment, a modification of the timer effect executed in each of the first region 9091 and the second region 9092 shown in the first other embodiment will be described. Here, as a typical example of the timer effect by the second other form example, the effect executed in the first area 9091 is shown, but the timer effect by the second other form example is similarly performed in the second area 9092. It is feasible.

The timer effect executed in the second other embodiment is a period in which an effect period such as a waiting time until a specific effect is executed is indicated in a timer display format when the variable display based on the hold storage information is executed. This is an effect of executing one of a plurality of types of effects when the timer display becomes a predetermined mode by updating the display. In the timer display, the timed value that is counted down is updated from the initial value of the timed value set at a predetermined timing, and finally, the value of the timer display becomes 0 (a value indicating 0 seconds). Such a timer display displayed during the timer effect is displayed on the effect display device 909 for a predetermined period during the variable display.

Further, during the execution of the timer effect, the timer display is counted down in the period from the start of the period display by the timer display to the time when the period display becomes 0, which is the predetermined mode, and then the timer display is displayed as the stop mode. It may be stopped for a second, and the value of the timer display may be set to 0 after passing through the stop mode. The effect of stopping the timer display countdown for several seconds in this way is hereinafter referred to as a freeze effect. The freeze effect may be such that the countdown of the timer display does not completely stop for several seconds, and the countdown does not proceed beyond a predetermined period. For example, if a freeze effect occurs in the timer display of "15:47" in the middle of the countdown, it is specified as a predetermined number such as "15:46" → "15:47" → "15:46". By going back and forth between the numbers and the numbers, the timer display may be produced so that the countdown does not proceed beyond a predetermined period. In addition, the countdown progresses from "15:47" → "15:46" → "15:45", but by making the countdown extremely slower than the actual timekeeping, it seems that the time has hardly advanced. It may be used as a production.

FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect in the second other embodiment. FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (e) are diagrams showing a display example of the timer display 9094 in the first region 9091 when the freeze effect is executed during the timer effect. Further, FIGS. 61 (f) to 61 (i) are diagrams showing a display example of the timer display 9094 in the first region 9091 when the freeze effect is not executed during the timer effect. Here, in the timer effect, any one of a plurality of types of time is determined as the number of seconds of the timer effect. In FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (e), a time of 30 seconds is selected as the period for executing the timer effect. Further, in FIGS. 61 (f) to (i), a time of 20 seconds is selected as the period for executing the timer effect. The timer effect of the second other embodiment may be executed in the second area 9092, or may be executed in any area in the effect display device 909.

As shown in FIG. 61A, when the timer effect is started, for example, a time counting period of "20:00" indicating 20 seconds as the timer display 9094 is displayed in the first area 9091. The period displayed on the timer display 9094 is displayed up to two digits (one hundredth digit) of seconds or less, and the value is counted down with the passage of time. FIG. 61B is a diagram showing a timer display 9094 displayed when 10 seconds have elapsed after counting down from 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), every 10 seconds, the LOCK display 9095 is displayed above the timer display 9094 when "10:00" indicating 10 seconds is displayed. The LOCK display 9095 is an action effect in which the display image acts on the timer display 9094, and the display image indicated by the characters of LOCK is added to the timer display 9094. By adding the LOCK display 9095 to the timer display 9094, the freeze effect is executed. By adding the LOCK display 9095 to the timer display 9094 in this way, the player can easily recognize that the freeze effect is being executed.

FIG. 61 (c) is a diagram showing a display mode of the timer display 9094 when 10 seconds have elapsed from the state of FIG. 61 (b). As shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (c), when the freeze effect is executed, the display of the timer display 9094 is stopped for 10 seconds while the display of "10:00" remains, and the LOCK display is displayed. 9095 is added. After the freeze period of 10 seconds has elapsed, the timer display 9094 is counted down again as shown in FIG. 61 (d). After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (e), the timer display 9094 is counted down and displayed at "00:00" indicating 0 seconds, which is a predetermined mode. Then, based on the timer display becoming 0 seconds, one of a plurality of types of effects is executed.

Here, an example is shown of the effect executed when the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds. The effects executed when the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds include, for example, an effect in which the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream temporarily stops (for example, the symbol described as "NEXT" temporarily stops), and a reach symbol. An effect indicating that the player has stopped and reached the reach (for example, the accessory operates at the timing when the reach symbol is stopped), and an effect indicating the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation during the reach effect (for example, the jackpot expectation during the reach). It changes to a high background). The effect executed when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds is not limited to the effect shown here, and may be any effect.

Next, the case where the freeze effect is not executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 (f) to 61 (i). When a time of 20 seconds is selected as the period for executing the timer effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), when the timer effect is started, for example, "20:00" indicating 20 seconds as the timer display 9094. The time counting time is displayed in the first area 9091. FIG. 61 (g) is a diagram showing a timer display 9094 displayed when 10 seconds have elapsed after counting down from 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 61 (g), "10:00" indicating 10 seconds is displayed every 10 seconds. Since the freeze effect is not executed, the LOCK display 9095 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (h), when 1 second has passed from FIG. 61 (g), the timer display is displayed at "09:00" indicating 9 seconds as shown in FIG. 61 (h). .. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (i), the timer display 9094 is counted down and displayed at "00:00" indicating 0 seconds, which is a predetermined mode. Then, based on the timer display becoming 0 seconds, one of a plurality of types of effects is executed. Here, in FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (i), the timer display 9094 having two digits of seconds or less is actually counted down, but is not disclosed in detail in the drawings. Further, it is possible to count down only the number of seconds such as "10", "9" ... "0" without displaying the two digits after the second.

In this way, the timer display 9094 displayed in the timer effect is a pattern that goes through the freeze effect in the period from the start of the display to the countdown to "00:00" indicating 0 seconds, which is a predetermined mode. And a pattern that does not go through the freeze effect. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 during the period from the start of the countdown by the timer display 9094 to 0 seconds.

Further, in the pattern in which the freeze effect is executed in the timer effect, as shown in FIGS. 61 (b) to 61 (d), after the freeze effect is executed for 10 seconds, the timer display 9094 is updated again. In this way, the player can pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 in the period until the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds.

Further, although the timer selection time for determining the number of timer seconds (the time from the start of the timer display to 0 seconds), which is the number of seconds for which the timer effect is executed, is different, as shown in FIG. 61, the freeze effect is produced. The display mode at the start of the timer display 9094 may be the same (both are the same at "20:00") depending on whether or not the freeze effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect without being asked whether or not to go through the freeze effect at the start of the timer display 9094.

[Third other form example]
In the third other embodiment, a modification of the timer effect executed in each of the first region 9091 and the second region 9092 shown in the first other embodiment will be described. Here, as a typical example of the timer effect by the third other form example, the effect executed in the first area 9091 is shown, but the timer effect by the third other form example is similarly performed in the second area 9092. It is feasible.

In the timer effect executed in the third other embodiment, a special pattern timer effect is set in addition to the normal pattern timer effect. The timer effect of the normal pattern is a pattern in which the display value of the timer display is only counted down with the passage of time in the period from the start of the timer display to the time when the timer display becomes 0 seconds. On the other hand, in the special pattern timer effect, when the timer display 9094 is counted down to 0 seconds, an effect using an operating means such as the stick controller 90122 is executed. The player's operation on the stick controller 90122 is detected by the tilt direction sensor unit 90123. Specifically, when the timer display 9094 is counted down to 0 seconds, if the player executes an operation of pulling the stick controller 90122, the number of seconds of the timer display 9094, which was 0 seconds, increases and the countdown is performed again. Is performed. Such a special pattern may be executed a plurality of times, and when it finally reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect is executed.

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect in the third other embodiment. FIG. 62A of FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a timing chart in the case of a two-time pattern with a timer selection time of 20 seconds as a special pattern for timer effect. The double pattern indicates an effect pattern in which the effect using the operating means is executed twice during the execution of the timer effect. Further, FIGS. 62 (b) to 62 (i) are diagrams showing a display example of the timer display 9094 in the pattern of FIG. 62 (a). First, a special pattern timer effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (i). The special pattern is not limited to the two-time pattern, but may be provided with a one-time pattern or a pattern of three or more times.

As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in the two-time pattern of the timer selection time of 20 seconds executed as the timer effect, "04:00" is first displayed on the timer display 9094 (FIG. 62 (b)). From this state, the countdown of the timer display 9094 is executed for 4 seconds. Then, when the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by "00:00" (FIG. 62 (c)), the operation effect of operating the operation means such as the stick controller 90122 is executed. In the stick controller 90122, the period during which the operation is valid (hereinafter, also referred to as the operation valid period) is set to 2 seconds. When the player executes the operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 during the operation valid period of 2 seconds, "+04: 00" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 (FIG. 62 (d)). )). The display of "+04: 00" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for the remaining operation valid period and the period obtained by adding 1 second (minimum period of the timer display) to the remaining operation period, and "00" as the timer display 9094. The number of seconds increases from ": 00", and the value of "04:00" is displayed in the first region 9091 (FIG. 62 (e)).

If the operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 is not executed within the operation valid period of 2 seconds, the display of "+04:00" is automatically displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 at the end of the operation valid period. It is displayed (FIG. 62 (d)). The display of "+04: 00" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for 1 second after the end of the operation valid period, and the number of seconds increases from "00:00" as the timer display 9094. The value of "04:00" is displayed in the first region 9091 (FIG. 62 (e)).

Here, regardless of whether the stick controller 90122 is operated or not, the display of "+04: 00" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for at least 1 second (FIG. 62 (d)). )). Further, the number of seconds is increased from "0:00" as the timer display 9094, and the value of "04:00" is displayed in the first area 9091 (FIG. 62 (e)). At this time, the player can recognize that the number of seconds of the timer display 9094 has increased. The total period of the operation valid period (operation 2 seconds in FIG. 62 (a)) and the timer display period of the effect display device 909 (timer display 1 second in FIG. 62 (a)) indicating the increased number of seconds of the timer display 9094 is 3. It is set to seconds.

After that, the timer display 9094 starts the countdown from 4 seconds indicated by "04:00", and when the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by "00:00" (FIG. 62 (f)), the timer display 9094 is again counted down. The effect of pulling the stick controller 90122 is executed during the operation valid period. When the operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 is executed by the player within 2 seconds, "+06: 00" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 (FIG. 62 (g)). The display of "+06: 00" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for the remaining operation valid period and the period obtained by adding 1 second to the time, and the number of seconds from "00:00" is displayed as the timer display 9094. It increases and the value of "06:00" is displayed in the first region 9091 (FIG. 62 (h)).

If the operation of pulling the stick controller 90122 is not executed within the operation valid period of 2 seconds, the display of "+06: 00" is automatically displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 at the end of the operation valid period. It is displayed (FIG. 62 (g)). The display of "+06: 00" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 for 1 second after the end of the operation valid period, and the number of seconds increases from "00:00" as the timer display 9094. The value of "06: 00" is displayed in the first region 9091 (FIG. 62 (h)).

When the timer display 9094 starts the countdown from 6 seconds and the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by "00:00" (FIG. 62 (i)), the predetermined effect is executed. Any effect may be used as the effect executed when the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds.

As described above, in the special pattern, when the timer effect is started and the timer display 9094 reaches the value indicated by 0 seconds, the number of seconds of the timer display 9094 is increased and the countdown is executed again. As a result, the player can pay attention to the effect when the value of the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds. Further, by the timer effect of such a special pattern, the player can pay attention to the display mode in the period from the start of the countdown of the timer display 9094 to the final value of the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds. it can.

[Fourth other form example]
In the fourth other embodiment, a modification of the timer effect executed in each of the first region 9091 and the second region 9092 shown in the first other embodiment will be described. Here, as a timer effect according to the fourth other mode example, an example of applying to each timer effect of the first region 9091 and the second region 9092 is shown in one region called the third region 9096 shown in FIG. 63. Will be described as a representative example.

The timer effect in the fourth other embodiment is performed during reach. Here, as shown in FIG. 45, the variation pattern that becomes the reach includes the variation pattern of the normal reach and the variation pattern of the super reach. When the variation pattern command for designating the super reach is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the effect of the designated super reach based on the transmitted command. In the first to fourth super reach of FIG. 45, one of the SP reach from a plurality of types of special reach (hereinafter, also simply referred to as SP reach) is executed for each fluctuation pattern.

In SP reach, any one of the effect symbols being displayed in a variable manner is reached. After that, it develops into SP reach after a predetermined time elapses from the reach state (after normal reach or after a reach effect different from normal reach). The SP reach executed in the super reach is a reach with a high degree of expectation that a big hit display result is obtained as compared with the normal reach that does not develop to the SP reach and does not produce a flashy effect after the reach. During SP reach, for example, an effect such as a battle effect is executed on the liquid crystal screen. The battle effect is an effect in which the jackpot display result is displayed when the ally character and the enemy character fight and the ally character wins, and the off display result is displayed when the ally character is defeated.

Further, in the fourth other embodiment, a case where the timer effect is started in the third area 9096, which is the lower center area of the display screen of the effect display device 909, will be described. For example, during SP reach, a flashy effect using the entire screen is executed. In such a case, the timer display 9094 displayed in the third area 9096 does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 909 (for example, the lower left position of the effect display device 909) so as not to interfere with such an effect. Move display 9094. In the fourth other embodiment, the timer effect and the SP reach are executed at the same time. The effect when the timer effect and the SP reach are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect in the fourth other embodiment. When the timer effect is executed, the pattern shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b) and the pattern shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (c) are executed. As shown in FIG. 63A, when the effect display device 909 is reaching with the symbol “4”, the timer image is displayed in the third area 9096 at the lower center of the screen. In the timer image, the timer display 9094 displayed as "20:00" is displayed. The timer display 9094 counts down with the passage of time.

The pattern from FIG. 63 (a) to FIG. 63 (b) shows the case of developing from a normal reach to a weak SP reach. The weak SP reach is an SP reach with a low expectation of a jackpot display result as compared with the strong SP reach described later. The degree of expectation as a jackpot display result is indicated by the number of black stars shown in FIG. 63 (b). The weak SP reach executed this time has an expectation level of 2 out of 5 levels, so the expectation level is not very high. During the weak SP reach, the effect symbol is displayed in the upper right area of the effect display device 909 as a command symbol in a miniaturized (reduced) mode. Further, the timer image moves from the position of the lower center on the screen to the position of the lower left end (the position corresponding to the first region 9091) when the weak SP reach is started.

When the SP reach is executed, the frame portion 9096a of the timer image may change. However, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), in the weak SP reach, the frame portion 9096a is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 63 (a) before the development to the SP reach. Further, the timer display 9094 is counted down and is indicated by "15:00". During the SP reach, a flashy effect using the entire display screen is executed as compared with the case shown in FIG. 63 (a) before the development of the SP reach. When a flashy effect such as the SP reach effect is executed, if the timer image is displayed in the third area 9096 at the lower center of the screen, the effect will be hindered. Therefore, when SP reach is executed in the period from the start of the timer display 9094 to the time when the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds, the timer display 9094 corresponds to the position at the left end of the screen (corresponding to the first area 9091). It is moved to the position to do). Further, when SP reach is not executed, the timer image does not change at the position of the lower center of the screen, and the countdown of the timer display 9094 is executed.

In this way, the position of the timer display 9094 is changed depending on whether or not the SP reach is executed during the period from the start of the display of the timer display 9094 to the time when the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to consider the situation of the production as to whether or not the production such as SP reach is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, FIG. 63 (c) shows a case where the reach state of FIG. 63 (a) has evolved into a strong SP reach. The strong SP reach is more expected to be a big hit display result than the weak SP reach. As shown in FIG. 63 (c), the strong SP reach executed this time has an expectation of 4 out of 5 levels, so it is shown that the big hit expectation is high. During the strong SP reach, the effect symbol is displayed in the upper right area of the effect display device 909 as a command symbol in a miniaturized (reduced) mode. Further, the timer image moves from the third region 9096 at the lower center on the screen to the position at the lower left end (the position corresponding to the first region 9091) when the strong SP reach is started.

Further, when the strong SP reach is executed, the mode of the frame portion 9096b of the timer image changes. For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the color of the frame portion 9096b changes from white to red (the shaded portion in FIG. 63 (c)). Further, the timer display 9094 is counted down and is indicated by "15:00". Even with strong SP reach, as with weak SP reach, if SP reach is executed during the period from the start of timer display 9094 until the timer display 9094 reaches 0 seconds, the timer display 9094 is on the left edge of the screen. It is moved to the position (the position corresponding to the first region 9091).

In this way, the position of the timer display 9094 is changed depending on whether or not the SP reach is executed during the period from the start of the display of the timer display 9094 to the time when the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to consider the situation of the production as to whether or not the production such as SP reach is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the SP reach is a reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach that ends without developing to the SP reach. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by considering that such a highly expected reach that becomes a big hit is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in the normal state (the state in which the reach is only applied) before the development of the SP reach, the timer display 9094 is displayed in the third area 9096 at the lower center of the effect display device 909. During the execution of SP reach, the timer display 9094 is displayed at the position of the lower left end of the effect display device 909 (the position corresponding to the first area 9091). Therefore, by preventing the timer display 9094 from obstructing the effect during SP reach, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, the frame portion 9096a of the timer image remains white when the weak SP reach is executed, and the frame portion 9096b of the timer image is changed to red when the strong SP reach is executed. Change and display. In this way, by setting the display mode of the frame of the timer display 9094 according to the SP reach to be executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit can be shown, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the timer effect of the fourth other form example is being executed, the second area effect as shown in the first other form example is executed at the position corresponding to the second area 9092. You may do so.

Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 55, after the special effect of FIG. 55 (b) is executed, the timer effect is executed as shown in FIG. 55 (d) and the timer effect is executed as shown in FIG. 55 (c). Since it may not be executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed, and the process before the timer effect is executed can be described in the game. You can improve your interest.

(2) As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the first region 9091, a special effect suggesting that the timer display 9094 is executed by displaying and hiding the timer frame 9097 is executed, so that the timer effect is produced. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not is executed, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the timer effect.

(3) As shown in FIG. 57, with respect to the first area effect, the area effect is executed at any timing because the special effect can be executed at a plurality of timings such as at the start of fluctuation or before the start of reach. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to the crab and enhance the interest of the game.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the selection ratio of the execution timing of the first area effect differs between the time of loss and the time of big hit, and the selection of the timer effect in the first area effect at the time of loss and the time of big hit. Since the ratios are different, it is possible to pay more attention to the timing at which the special effect is executed.

(5) As shown in FIG. 58, as the timer frame 9097 to be displayed and hidden during the special effect, there are a plurality of types of special effects, that is, a special effect that displays the white timer frame 9097 and a special effect that displays the red timer frame 9097. By being able to execute any one of them, it is possible to pay attention to which kind of special effect is executed.

(6) As shown in FIG. 58, since the white timer frame display / hidden display can be executed even before the red timer numerical display is executed, a special effect of displaying the white timer frame display / hidden is executed. Even if it is done, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the jackpot game state from being lowered.

(7) As shown in FIGS. 55 (e) and 55 (f) and 59, by executing the second region effect, the super reach effect is executed after the timer effect such as "READY GO" is executed. The timer effect is specified by selecting and executing the timer effect suggestion display suggesting that and the specific display suggesting that an effect other than the timer effect such as "?" Is executed. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before executing the timer effect.

(8) As display patterns in the second area 9092, a timer display pattern for displaying a timer effect suggestion such as the “READY GO” display shown in FIG. 59 and displaying the timer, a “?” Display shown in FIG. 59, and the like. By providing a display pattern of the specific display that displays the specific display of, it is possible to pay attention to whether the timer effect is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and the process before the timer effect is executed is further enjoyed in the game. Can be improved.

(9) As shown in FIG. 57, with respect to the second area effect, since the special effect can be executed at a plurality of timings such as at the start of fluctuation or before the start of reach, the area effect is executed at any timing. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to the crab and enhance the interest of the game.

(10) As a specific display, the expectation degree suggestion suggesting the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot game state, such as the display of "No way? (Low expectation degree)" and "Intense heat (high expectation degree)" in FIG. 59. By including the display, it is possible to pay attention to whether the timer display is displayed or the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the specific display.

(11) Whether the timer display is displayed by including the re-variation suggestion display suggesting that the pseudo-ream display such as "NEXT (pseudo-ream suggestion)" in FIG. 59 is included as the specific display. , It is possible to pay more attention to whether the specific display is displayed, and when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to pay more attention to the display mode of the specific display.

(12) By including a reach suggestion display suggesting the type of reach effect such as "battle (battle reach suggestion)" in FIG. 59 as the specific display, the timer display is displayed even more specifically. Can be noticed, and when the specific display is displayed, the display mode of the specific display can be further paid attention to.

(13) As shown in FIG. 61, the timer display 9094 displayed in the timer effect is counted down from the start of the display until it reaches "00:00" indicating 0 seconds, which is a predetermined mode. A pattern that goes through the freeze effect and a pattern that does not go through the freeze effect are provided. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the display mode of the timer display 9094 during the period from the start of the countdown by the timer display 9094 to 0 seconds.

(14) As shown in FIG. 62, the value of the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds because a special pattern in which the time counting value of the timer display 9094 increases when the timer display 9094 becomes 0 seconds can be executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the production at the time.

(15) As shown in FIG. 63, the position of the third region 9096 can be changed depending on whether or not SP reach is executed, so that an effect such as SP reach is executed. The situation of the game can be taken into consideration, and the interest of the game is improved.

Next, modification examples, feature points, and the like of the embodiments described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in the area effect execution determination table of FIG. 56, the area effect is executed in the first area 9091, the second area 9092, the first area 9091, and the second area 9092. Explained. However, the area effect may be executed only in one of the areas. In such a case, if it is decided to execute the area effect in one of the areas, the area effect may be restricted not to be executed in the other area.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the timer effect (gase effect) is executed in the first area 9091 and the case where the execution of the timer effect is restricted in the second area 9092 has been described. However, the timer effect may be executed at the same time in both the first region 9091 and the second region 9092. In such a case, the numerical value of the timer display 9094 displayed in the first area 9091 and the numerical value of the timer display 9094 displayed in the second area 9092 may be updated at the same time. Further, the numerical value at that time may be the same or different in one region and the other region. Further, the numerical countdown in the other area may be started after the numerical countdown in one area is completed.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the timer effect may be executed in the first region 9091 and the second region 9092. Then, when the numerical values of the timer display 9094 in the first area 9091 and the second area 9092 simultaneously become values indicating 0 seconds, a predetermined effect may be executed. In such a case, the jackpot value expectation may be higher when the timer effect is executed in both areas than when the timer effect is executed in only one area.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, the timing at which the area effect is executed is the time when the fluctuation starts or the time before the reach starts. However, the timing at which the area effect is executed may be a timing other than this. For example, timings such as a predetermined timing when the reach is established or during the reach, a timing when the most variable display of the pseudo-ream is started, a timing when the SP reach is started, and a timing when the look-ahead effect is executed may be executed. .. Moreover, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the execution timing. Further, it may be executed at two or more timings out of a plurality of timings.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the timer may be displayed as a pending continuous notice during the big hit game. The hold ream notice is a so-called hold ream chan (a so-called hold ream chan) in which the hold memory at the time when the jackpot display result is obtained and the hold memory during the jackpot game are pre-read and a new jackpot is generated in the hold memory. It is a thing that foretells that a big hit game state (occurrence of continuous occurrence) has occurred. For example, when there is such a hold memory, the timer effect is started at a predetermined timing before the end of the big hit, and the variable display of the hold memory which becomes the big hit is started when the numerical value of the timer becomes 0. You can do it like this.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the timer effect may be executed during the jackpot round. In such a case, for example, the hold continuous notice may be executed at the timing when the numerical value of the timer becomes 0, the probability change notification indicating the probability change state may be executed, or the round continues. You may perform a round continuation announcement indicating whether or not to do so.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the effect to be executed at the time of the special effect and the time of the timer effect is determined at the same time in the first area effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 58 has been described. However, the effect to be executed at the time of the special effect and the time of the timer effect may be determined separately. Further, the frame color may be determined when determining the effect to be executed by the special effect, and the display color of the timer may be determined when determining the effect to be executed by the timer effect.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, the content of the hold storage data is determined (look-ahead) before the variable display performed according to the hold storage is started, and before the variable display is started. The area effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect for notifying the hold storage data. In such a case, a display such as "preparing" may be displayed in the area where the area effect is executed to indicate to the player that the area effect is executed.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, the timer effect may be executed a plurality of times when the timer effect is executed. In such a case, the number of executions of the timer effect to be executed in the future may be indicated. For example, when displaying "x2", it may be indicated that the timer effect is executed twice. Further, the number of times the timer effect is executed may be indicated by displaying a plurality of timer images.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, the timer subtraction time may be set to one pattern by displaying "preparing" when executing the timer effect and changing the display period of "preparing". Specifically, "preparing" may be displayed during the fluctuation display, and the timer display displayed thereafter may be displayed as the timer display 9094 for 5 seconds regardless of the fluctuation pattern. .. By doing so, since the actual subtraction time of the timer can be set to one pattern, the design of the effect can be facilitated, and the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, with respect to the effect executed in the second area 9092, the jackpot expectation is different depending on whether the period display is executed or the specific display other than the period display is executed. May be good. For example, when the period display is executed, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the specific display is executed, or when the specific display is executed, the period display is executed. The jackpot expectation may be higher than in the case.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the frame of the second region 9092 is always displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 is shown. However, the frame of the second area 9092 may be displayed only at the timing when the area effect is executed. Further, the special effect may be executed for the second area 9092 as well.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, the timer display 9094, in which the digital display is counted down with time, has been described as the period display displayed by the timer effect. However, the timer display 9094 may count up the numbers with time, and the effect may be executed when the predetermined time is reached. In addition, instead of displaying numerical values as a period display showing the passage of time, an hourglass image showing the passage of time (indicating time by the remaining amount of sand in the hourglass) or a gauge image showing the passage of time is displayed. Any effect may be used as long as the information that can suggest the end timing of a predetermined period is changed with the passage of time, such as the one displayed by using (indicating the time by increasing or decreasing the gauge). ..

(14) In the above-described embodiment, a configuration of a period display means for showing the elapsed information of the period by updating the period display is provided. In addition, a configuration of a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect when the period display updated by the period display means becomes a predetermined mode is provided. However, in the configuration of the period display means, the period display may be simply displayed without being updated. Specifically, as a display mode indicating the period display, an image in which the squib of the bomb is lit may be displayed. In such an image, it can be seen that the period is displayed because the fuse of the bomb is lit, but the fuse itself may not be shortened. Then, an image in which the fuse of the bomb as a period display is lit may be displayed for a predetermined period and then explode to execute some effect.

(15) In the above-described embodiment, the predetermined effect executed when the timer display becomes 0 may be any effect. For example, the reach symbol stops as a predetermined effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol when executing the pseudo-continuous effect stops, the notice that the big hit is confirmed (big hit confirmation sound, premium notice, etc.), the predetermined super Something that develops into reach and something that works as a character may be executed. In such a case, at the timing when the timer display becomes 0, any of the effects selected from the plurality of types of effects may be executed. For example, if one notification (big hit confirmation notice) is executed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

(16) In the above-described embodiment, when the area effect is executed in both the first area 9091 and the second area 9092, the timer effect is executed in one area, and the value becomes 0. At that time, the timer effect may be started in the other area.

(17) In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but in the various settings shown in the above-described embodiment, medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets, and the player determines the number of bets. When a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever and the symbols in the display means are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number It is also possible to apply the medals to slot machines (slot machines) that are paid out to players. Specifically, the area effect may be executed in a display device such as an effect display device provided in the slot machine.

(18) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. However, not limited to this, the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a time saving state, and a high base state.

(19) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 9027R, 9027L, etc.) are mounted. You may also provide two boards, one with the second effect control board.

(20) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, but the game control microcomputer 90560 is another substrate (for example, the figure). For the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, etc. shown in 42, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the voice output board 9070 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035). The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 on the effect control board 9080 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 by executing the control related to the voice control and the lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 9070 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 9035 or the sound / lamp board. In the case of such a configuration, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may similarly perform various determinations made by the effect control microcomputer 90100 in the above-described embodiment, or the sound output. Control means such as a substrate 9070, a lamp driver substrate 9035, or a microcomputer mounted on a sound / lamp substrate may perform the operation.

(21) In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer of the variation time and the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, one when the variation is started. Although an example of transmitting a variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a slip effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after the reach (if it does not reach, the so-called second stop). A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode of (after) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the game control microcomputer notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the production control microcomputer selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced. In the configuration in which the fluctuation pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by the two commands in this way, in the second command after the first command is transmitted, the judgment result of the display result by the effect processing at the time of winning, Then, the look-ahead determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo-ream is a pseudo-ream, which is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed, although it is originally a one-time fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous fluctuation. Further, slipping refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol is stopped in the variable display.

(22) The above-described embodiment can also be applied to a device such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided to the computer device or the like by the detachable recording medium, and the storage device of the computer device or the like in advance. You may take the form of distribution by pre-installing on. Further, the program and the data may be distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. The embodiment of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(23) As an embodiment of this embodiment, a gaming machine that pays out a game medium to a player's hand when a prize is generated has been described, but the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is delivered to the player when a prize is generated. An enclosed gaming machine that adds game points (scores) without paying out at hand may be adopted. The enclosed gaming machine is provided with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which is an example of a gaming medium, in the gaming machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball firing operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

(24) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" are variablely displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the symbol to be variablely displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variablely displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

(25) In the above-described embodiment, a predetermined value exceeding 0% as the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described as a specific example. However, the "ratio (ratio, probability)" may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence rate of the predetermined game state 1 and the occurrence rate of the other game state 2 in the predetermined game period are compared and it is determined that "one occurrence rate is higher than the other occurrence rate". , The case where the occurrence rate of one of the gaming states is 0% is also included.

(26) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when it is determined that the display result of the variation display is the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, the probability variation state is unconditionally changed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. An example of controlled probability change state control is shown. However, not limited to this, the probability change determination device is controlled to the probability change state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 9020. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

(27) It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 5 ... Image display device 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 8L, 8R ... Speaker 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control CPU
123 ... Display control unit VL ... Volume status display image 901 ... Pachinko game machine 909 ... Production display device 9091 ... First area 9092 ... Second area 90100 ... Production control microcomputer 90560 ... Game control microcomputer

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can display fluctuations and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Period display means to display the period display and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect when the period display becomes a predetermined mode,
In the display area of the period display, a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display different from the period display, and
Music playback means that can play music in a specific period,
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player,
Regarding the production related to the game, it is possible to adjust the production based on the operation of the operation means by the player.
The music to be played in the specific period can be selected from a plurality of types of music.
The music playing means reproduces a specific part that is a part of the selected music at the time of music selection and is different from the beginning of the music.
At the time of the production adjustment, it is possible to display the status display regarding the adjustment status.
In the first state, the situation display is visibly displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the operation for adjusting the effect.
In the second state in which the specific effect is executed in a state different from the first state, if there is no operation for adjusting the effect, the situation display is made difficult to see or invisible, and the operation for adjusting the effect is performed. If there is, the status display is visibly displayed until the predetermined conditions are satisfied.
When the operation for adjusting the effect is performed in the first state, the display of the status display is continued even if the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The period display is
Depending on the execution contents of executable special effect before the period display is displayed, different ratio of the period appears after the special effect is performed,
In the case uncontrolled advantageously state and when it is controlled to an advantageous state, different proportions of or determining in any of the plurality of execution timing the period display,
In the case uncontrolled and advantageous condition when controlled to an advantageous state, Ri Do different percentage of either determining in any of the periods display of the display mode of the plurality of display modes,
The specific display is an expectation suggestion display that suggests an expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a reach suggestion display that suggests which of a plurality of types of reach effects that can be executed in the variable display is executed. And, including
The expectation suggestion display is a first expectation suggestion display suggesting that the expectation is the first expectation, and a second suggestion that the expectation is a second expectation higher than the first expectation. Including expectation suggestion display
The predetermined effect is a gaming machine including the reach effect and a notification effect for notifying that the player is controlled to the advantageous state.

Images